miami university oxford, ohio macmillan hall …...miami university oxford, ohio macmillan hall...

MIAMI UNIVERSITY

Oxford, Ohio

MacMILLAN HALL

RENOVATIONSSSOE Project No. 018-01130-00

ISSUED FOR BIDS / PERMITS

March 1, 2019

SSOE GROUP

1001 Madison Avenue

Toledo, Ohio 43604

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

MIAMI UNIVERSITYMacMILLAN HALL RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO. 018-01130-00

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements

Introductory Information00 0110 Table of Contents

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

Division 01 – General Requirements01 1111 Summary of Work01 4100 Special Inspections01 7310 Cutting and Patching

Division 02 – Existing Conditions– Not Used

02 4119 Selective Demolition

Division 03 – Concrete03 3100 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete

Division 04 – Masonry04 2000 Unit Masonry

Division 05 – Metals05 1100 Structural Metals05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing05 5000 Metal Fabrications

Division 06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites06 1000 Rough Carpentry06 2000 Carpentry and Millwork

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Control07 2100 Insulation07 9200 Caulking and Sealants

Division 08 – Openings08 1100 Steel Doors and Frames08 2110 Flush Wood Doors08 5113 Aluminum Projected Windows08 7100 Door Hardware08 8000 Glass and Glazing

Division 09 – Finishes09 2500 Gypsum Wallboard (Drywall)09 3000 Tile09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings09 6500 Resilient Flooring and Base09 6810 Carpet Tile09 9100 Painting

Division 10 – Specialties10 1100 Visual Display Surfaces10 2600 Wall Protection10 2800 Toilet Room Accessories and Mirrors


TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2

Division 12 – Furnishings12 2000 Window Treatments

Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning23 0507 Piping Materials and Methods23 0550 Flexible HVAC Pipe Connectors23 0553 Identification of HVAC Piping and Equipment23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC23 0716 HVAC Insulation23 2113 Hydronic Piping23 3113 Metal Ducts23 3616 Air Terminal Units23 3713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles

Division 26 – Electrical26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical26 05 19 Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding26 05 29 Hangers and Supports26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes26 05 53 Identification26 27 26 Wiring Devices26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers26 51 00 Interior Lighting

END OF DOCUMENT

MIAMI UNIVERSITYMacMILLAN HALL RENOVATIONS 2019 PROJECT NO. 018-01130-00

SUMMARY OF WORK 011111-1

MIAMI UNIVERSITYMacMILLAN HALL RENOVATIONS 2019

OXFORD, OHIO

Summary of Work

Scope of Work

1. Conflicting Information – If conflicting information exists on the Bid Documents the Contractor shall comply with the most stringent quality and highest quantity requirement. The contractor shall notify the Architect in writing of any conflicts or discrepancies prior to submitting a bid proposal and prior to the start of work.

It is the responsibility of each trade to bid this project from a complete set of plans and specifications. Any information found on the plans and not in the specifications, or found in the specifications and not on the drawings, shall be construed as to be included in both the specifications and the plans. Any conflict between the plans and the specifications will be interpreted by the Architect.

2. Furnish and install all of the items listed in this scope of work to make a complete working system unless otherwise noted.

3. The following items of work only represent a portion or highlights portions of the work of this contract. It is strongly encouraged that all bidders visit the proposed site and read and understand not only these sections of work but all scopes of work, general and special conditions of this contract as well. The contents of the following scope of work supersede any and all notations on the drawings pertaining to scope responsibility.

4. Review all drawings and notes and coordinate work with respective contractors.

5. Engineering, layout and control as required completing the respective work items of this bid package.

6. All trade permits, licenses, fees and inspection required to complete this work are to be by contractor.

7. All Materials and/or testing and inspections required for this scope of work as listed in the specifications. All copies of the field reports and tests will be copied and submitted to the Owner’s Representative as specified in the specifications. Any areas that fail to satisfy specifications could result in taking action against this contractor per Article 5 of the General Conditions for this contract. Contractor to notify the Owner’s Representative the same day of any and all non-conforming test results. (Testing Cost will be by Owner)



8. Barricades, rails, flashing lights, signs, and any other safety requirements for this scope of work to meet all state and OSHA guidelines.

9. Protection of existing work that is to remain such as walks, structures, utilities and any other items that are to become a permanent part of this project.

10. Street cleaning and dust control in accordance with any governing agencies and at the direction of the Owner’s Representative to maintain clean safe roadways and to maintain dust control.

11. Daily clean-up of debris caused by contractor and its work force.

12. Repair of any existing lawn areas that become damaged during construction.

13. Remove, and legally dispose of off-site, all demolition materials required by the drawings, specifications and any governing agency.

14. Contractor shall include furnishing, installing and maintaining all soil and sediment control around the site as shown and called for in the documents. Refer to civil drawings for locations.

15. As-built drawings updated throughout the course of the project. Owner’s Representative may review as-built drawings no less than once monthly for verification that current changes in location and elevation are being recorded.

16. All openings must be protected according to OSHA standards.

17. Provide temporary facilities as indicated in the General and Special Requirements.

18. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electric Code, Federal, State and Local requirements.

19. The drawings and specifications are complementary and shall be included to the scope of work herein.

20. Structural excavation and backfill for foundations, footers, raised slabs, etc., in accordance with drawings and specifications. Backfill to be compacted premium material or as specified, excess excavated material to be legally disposed of offsite, drainage system with all necessary tie-ins, and testing to a finish elevation in accordance with drawings and specifications.

21. Unit masonry is to include scaffolding, layout, masonry materials, reinforcing and lintels (brick, block and mortar), grouting of all hollow metal frames, testing, photographic record of flashing installation and mock-ups in accordance with drawings and specifications. Coordinate opening required by other trades and provide lintels.

22. Provide all safety measures for temporary and permanent power that meets all state and OSHA guidelines. For example (GFIC receptacles, lock out tag out, locked out breaker panels when energized, warning signs).



23. Contractor to work with Owner’s testing agency and coordinate all activities with agency and ensure agency is on site for all activities requiring on-site inspections and testing.

24. All joints shall be sealed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

25. Attend installation coordination meetings for this project as required to help make a clean, operable, and maintainable system. Date and contractors to be determined.

26. General building permit will be obtained by the Architect. All other trade permits, licenses, fees and inspections required to complete this work are to be by this contractor.

27. Install rated walls per UL numbers listed on drawings. Seal all penetrations through walls to maintain UL rating.

28. Structural steel shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional structural engineer. As required by the State of Ohio, per OBC section 106.1.1: Provide on the steel shop drawings large-scale sections and details as required to adequately show the structural steel framing of each type of structural condition contained in the steel frame portion of the addition, including the structural detailing of each type of steel to steel connection and steel to masonry or concrete connection, top and base plate sizes and thicknesses, weld types, sizes and lengths, etc. Per OBC sections 106.2, the structural shop drawings shall bear the original seal and signature of the engineer responsible for their preparation.

29. Schedule and provide owner training of all systems that are part of this contract including videotaping of the training sessions.

Architectural

30. Rough carpentry and interior architectural woodwork, all necessary interior wood blocking/fire rated, all necessary exterior wood blocking, all necessary fastening hardware, and installation for all trades items in accordance with drawings and specifications. Coordinate location and requirements with other trades. Blocking shall be furnished for contractor and owner supplied wall mounted equipment.

31. Building insulation and concealed building insulation in accordance with drawings and specifications.

32. Joint sealants, fire-stopping, and interior caulking of dissimilar surfaces and expansion joints, and mock-ups in accordance with drawings and specifications.

33. Coordinate and install all built in access doors and frames.

34. Furnish and install all aluminum entrances and storefronts, any design calculations, etc., in accordance with drawings and specifications.

35. Aluminum windows, fixed windows in accordance with drawings and specifications.



36. Glazing, any required field measuring, all required glazing accessories, removal of all tags and labels, and removal of any protective materials and adhesives, caulking, final cleaning etc., in accordance with drawings and specifications.

37. Gypsum board assemblies, steel studs, insulation (thermal and sound), gypsum board (regular, type X, water-resistant and sag-resistant), trim accessories (casing beads, corner beads, edge beads, expansion joints, control joints and plastic edge trim), and joint treatment in accordance with drawings and specifications.

38. Painting, finishing and high-performance coatings, priming and finish coats of all exterior and interior exposed surfaces, surface acceptance, preparation and protection of items not to be painted in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

39. Louvers, vents and any caulking and painting associated with in accordance with drawings and specifications.

40. Toilet and bath accessories and coordination with Owner supplied items in accordance with drawings and specifications.

41. Provide wood blocking or metal clips in wall cavity for installation of window, storefront and curtain-wall systems as required by window manufacturer/installer.

42. Provide hollow metal doors, frames, lintels and blocking, and architectural wood doors. Coordinate installation with door hardware, card readers, raceways and power source requirements for a complete operating system

43. Door hardware, each set of hardware (per door number) to be assembled at the suppliers shop and sent to the jobsite bagged and tagged with door number (all large items to be tagged with door number) in accordance with drawings and specifications.

44. Provide and install plastic laminate casework and solid surface countertops as shown on drawings and specifications.

45. Provide and install floor leveling compound and transitions per the flooring specification to provide level surface for new finishes. Field coordinate new finishes abutting existing finishes.

46. Provide plaster materials and finishes as necessary to repair / patch / or install new where shown to match existing thicknesses, textures and finishes in accordance with drawings and specifications and as necessary to patch existing walls at new work..

47. Acoustical panel, grid systems, panels, lay-in ceilings, and extra materials in accordance with drawings and specifications.

48. Floor treatments are as follows:

a. Carpet tile, porcelain floor tile and base, resilient floor tile/sheet goods, resilient wall base and accessories and sealed concrete flooring: including prep, installation and required finishes in accordance with drawings and specifications.



b. Provide: Flooring moisture testing required within specification sections (copy SSOE and Owner’s Representative on testing results prior to placement) any necessary leveling, minor crack repair, sweep and vacuum cleaning, extra materials, final cleaning and floor prep in accordance with drawings and specifications.

c. Provide and install protection for all floor finishes after installation to protect floor from damage.

49. Wall protection per plans and specifications.

50. Provide new solid surface sills and window shades per drawings and specifications.

51. Provide wall tile per drawings and specifications.

52. Painting, finishing and high-performance coatings, priming and finish coats of all exterior and interior exposed surfaces, surface acceptance, preparation and protection of items not to be painted in accordance with the drawings and specifications. All surfaces to receive new paint finishes shall be properly prepped prior to installation of any coats of primers or paints.

53. Provide painted accent feature wall per elevations.

54. Provide and install visual display surfaces, marker boards, etc., in accordance with drawings and specifications.

55. Toilet and bath accessories, all layout, all required fasteners and hardware, and removal of all labels and adhesives, and final cleaning of surfaces in accordance with drawings and specifications.

56. Provide interior signage per specifications.

Structural

57. Construct the building per the construction documents.

58. Perform special inspections on all construction materials and procedures in accordance with the 2017 Ohio Building Code requirements and as defined on drawings.

59. Cold form metal framing engineer should be registered in the project state.

60. Connections between items supported by the structure and the structure not specifically detailed in the contract documents are the responsibility of the contractor. Such connections shall be designed, coordinated and inspected by a professional structural engineer licensed in the state of the project. Submit signed and sealed calculations as a formal submittal to the structural engineer of record. Per the AISC code of standard practice, provide correlation between calculations and connections shown on the structural steel shop drawings.



Plumbing

61. Provide new plumbing fixtures and all associated piping, valves, hangers, etc.

62. Provide all piping and associated items to complete water piping system as shown.

63. Provide complete sanitary and vent system throughout the renovation area and connect into existing sanitary sewer inside the building.

Fire Protection

64. Pendent sprinklers with bright white (non-domed) concealed cover plates will be installed in all areas with ceilings. Brass upright sprinklers on exposed piping will be installed in unfinished areas; match facility standards and as noted on drawings

65. Piping will be designed in accordance with NFPA 13 and local requirements.

66. All piping to be carbon steel with cast/malleable iron threaded fittings and/or grooved ductile iron fittings.

67. All sprinklers, valves and other devices to be UL listed and/or FM approved where applicable.

Mechanical

68. Remove ductwork, fintube radiation and piping as indicated on the demolition plan.

69. Relocate two existing air terminal units with hot water reheat coil and controls. Reconnect to existing duct at new location. Reconnect to existing hot water piping at new location. Reconnect control devices.

70. Relocate existing air devices as required to match new ceiling and wall layout.

71. Furnish and install pipe and duct insulation.

72. Furnish and install new ductwork and all associated grilles, diffusers, registers, etc.

73. Relocate existing control devices as required by floor plan modifications. Provide wiring as required to reconnect control devices and relocated equipment with BACnet controls to the existing Siemens control system. Update graphic screens as required for new setpoints, etc.

74. Work shall include rigging, hauling, protections of permanent equipment and the building structures, and cleaning up. Care shall be exercised to keep dust and dirt to a minimum and to confine it to the area where the work is being performed. All debris shall be promptly removed.



Electrical

75. Demolition of lighting and power in designated areas and where it is required for new construction under the scope of this project.

76. Installation of manual and automatic lighting controls corresponding to new light fixtures that are installed.

77. Installation of building interior light fixtures, supports, wiring etc….

78. Installation of branch wiring including overload protection and disconnecting means.

79. Wiring devices, multi-gang back boxes plates and supporting hardware and/or equipment.

80. Wiring of and final connections to equipment furnished by others, including but not limited to casework pedestal outlets, fire alarm, security, paging system, general purpose receptacles, receptacles for specific equipment including but not limited to office equipment, vending machines, and technology devices owner furnished or otherwise.

81. Required material and labor necessary to complete project scope as indicated within complete specifications, drawings or schedules.

82. 2010 ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Code compliance

Technology

83. See plan for locations of fire alarm and data devices that will require removal and or relocation

84. Contractor shall expand / adjust existing fire alarm system throughout renovated areas. See plans for new or relocated fire alarm device locations

85. Contractor shall expand / adjust existing data system throughout renovated areas. See plans for new or relocated data device locations

86. All work shall be done per federal, state and local codes, requirements, and regulations, and shall be approved by the AHJ and owner

END OF SECTION 011111


SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 014100-1

SECTION 014100 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Instructions to Bidders, and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 GENERAL

A. The Special Inspections requirements described herein are in addition to inspections and testing required by the project contract documents and Section 109 of the Ohio Building Code.

B. Special Inspectors shall comply with the Report requirements in Section 1704.1.2 of the Ohio Building Code.

1704.1.2 Report Requirement. Special Inspectors shall keep records of inspections. The Special Inspector shall furnish inspections reports to the building official, and to the registered design professional in responsible charge. Reports shall indicate that work inspected was done in conformance to approved Construction Documents. Discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction. If the discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the building official and to the registered design professional in responsible charge prior to the completion of that phase of the work. A final report of inspections documenting required Special Inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted periodically at a frequency agreed upon by the permit applicant and the building official prior to the start of work.

C. In the absence of a frequency of reporting agreed upon by the permit applicant and the building official, the following shall be the required frequency of reporting. Initial report of Special Inspections shall be distributed to the building official and registered design professional in responsible charge no later than 2 weeks following the date of inspection. Follow-up reports (if necessary due to material curing and testing times) shall be distributed to the building official and registered design professional in charge no later than 2 weeks following the date of final testing.

1.03 REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (PER OHIO BUILDING CODE CHAPTER 17)

A. Structural Steel: Structural steel will not be significant component of the TPS building designs. The majority of components like joists. Field welds will be minimized and of types that only require visual observation. The structural steel Special Inspection will be performed upon completion of the steel erection.


SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 014100-2

1. Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts and washers. Once.2. Inspection of high strength bolting bearing type connections. Once.3. Visual inspection of field welds and roof deck welds. Once.

B. Concrete Construction

1. Cast-in-place concrete construction will mostly be incorporated in footings and floor slabs on grade.

2. Post-tensioned concrete construction and shored construction will not be used. Periodic inspection of reinforcement and embedments immediately prior to placement of the concrete and continuous sampling of fresh concrete during placement are normal industry requirements. Periodic inspection of concrete placement techniques and periodic inspection of curing temperature and techniques will be performed weekly.

a. Inspection of reinforcing steel. Periodic.b. Verifying use of required design mix. Periodic.c. Sampling fresh concrete.

Continuous.d. Inspection of concrete placement for proper techniques. Weekly.e. Inspection for specified curing temperature and techniques.

Weekly.

END OF SECTION


CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 1

SECTION 017310 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Instructions to Bidders and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 02 Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building.

C. Cutting and Patching is the responsibility of the Prime contract requiring access.

D. Patching due to demolition work is the responsibility of the trade for the item that was demolished. Patching must be completed by skilled workers trained to complete the work in the materials being patched.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that



results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Secitons where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.



1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Exposed Finishes: Masonry: Where patching is required in exposed masonry, saw cut existing masonry and tooth in new masonry to match the existing coursing. Where new openings in CMU walls are required, and the masonry jamb and / or sill will be exposed in the finished work, provide bullnose CMU.

4. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a surface painted as a part of this project or existing painted surface which is not scheduled to be repainted, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

5. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

6. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. Where new openings in face brick are required, if the jambs will be exposed in the finished work, saw cut brick and tooth in new face brick to match the existing at the jambs. Where sills will be exposed, provide rowlock face brick to match the existing.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011111 "Summary of Work" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 017300 "Execution Requirements" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor with the exception of recyclable steel, copper and other metals.



1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of

materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.6. Other items as necessary.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of any necessary barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

D. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:



a. School Furniture and Equipment.b. Books, Texts and other Instructional materials.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. Refer to the attachment, issued for reference only, of Floor Plans showing locations of asbestos containing materials.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately

notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:

1. None.

B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

D. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

2. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and templates.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01111 "Summary of Work."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.



1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies, coordinate with owner.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. If demolition of mechanical, plumbing or electrical items leaves an opening in a floor, wall, ceiling or roof, the trade responsible for the demolition of the item is responsible for patching the resulting opening. Refer to specification section “Cutting and Patching”.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."



C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable

materials and promptly dispose of off-site.6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to

avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as

not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for

new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be



removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw and remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings."

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Existing Construction to Be Removed: interior partitions, doors, lintels, ceilings, lights, piping, fixtures, devices, masonry walls, etc ….



B. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: existing face brick

C. Existing Items to Remain: Masonry exterior walls, roof structure, interior walls, etc….

END OF SECTION

MIAMI UNIVERSITY MacMILLAN HALL RENOVATIONS 2019 PROJECT NO. 018-01130-00

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3100-1

SECTION 03 3100 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Instructions to Bidders, and general provisions of the contract, including General

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture

design, placement procedures, and finishes for projects using concrete.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ACI 301 - SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS.

B. ACI 315 - DETAILS AND DETAILING OF CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT.

C. ACI 318 - BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE.

D. ANSI/ASTM A185 - WELDED STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT.

E. ANSI/ASTM A497 - WELDED DEFORMED STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT.

F. ASTM A615 - DEFORMED AND PLAIN BILLET-STEEL BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT.

G. CRSI - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT STEEL INSTITUTE MANUAL OF PRACTICE.

H. CRSI 63 - RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PLACING REINFORCEMENT BARS.

I. CRSI 65 - RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PLACING BAR SUPPORTS, SPECIFICATION AND NOMENCLATURE

J. ACI 305 - HOT WEATHER CONCRETING.

K. ACI 306 - COLD WEATHER CONCRETING.

L. ACI 308 - STANDARD PRACTICE FOR CURING CONCRETE.

M. ACI 347 - RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CONCRETE FRAMEWORK.



N. ACI C33 - CONCRETE AGGREGATES

O. ASTM C94 - READY-MIXED CONCRETE.

P. ASTM C150 - PORTLAND CEMENT.

Q. ASTM C260 - AIR ENTRAINING ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE.

R. ASTM C494 - CHEMICAL ADMIXTURE FOR CONCRETE.

S. ASTM C618 - FLY ASH AND RAW OR CALCINATED NATURAL POZZOLAN FOR USE AS A MINERAL ADMIXTURE IN PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE.

1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of

blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans complying with ASTM C618, ground granulated blast-furnace slag complying with ASTM C989, and silica fume complying with ASTM C1240.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Admixtures containing chlorides may not be

used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer’s plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Comply with ACI 301, “Specification for Structural Concrete,” including the following sections:

1. “General Requirements.” 2. “Formwork and Formwork Accessories.” 3. “Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports.” 4. “Concrete Mixtures.” 5. “Handling, Placing and Constructing.”

D. Comply with ACI 117, “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete and Materials.”



1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work

from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40°F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and

as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90ºF at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. 2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185. 2.03 VAPOR BARRIER A. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E 1745 meeting or exceeding Class B, not less than 10 mils thick.

Include manufacturer’s recommended pressure-sensitive joint tape. Vapor permeance (ASTM E-96): 0.025 gr/SF/hr or lower.



B. Products:

1. Stego Wrap by Stego Industries 2. Perminator by W.R. Meadows 3. VaporBlock by Raven Industries

2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, TYPE I, TYPE II, TYPE III, TYPE IV, TYPE V, PORTLAND TYPE; OR ASTM C595, TYPE IP, PORTLAND POZZOLAN CEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED 25% BY WEIGHT. DIFFERENT CEMENTS SHALL NOT BE USED INTERCHANGEABLY IN THE SAME ELEMENT OR PORTION OF WORK. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class c or F.

B. Aggregate:

1. Course: ASTM C33, No. 57 2. Fine: ASTM C33

C. Water: ASTM C 94 potable. 2.05 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. Admixtures containing chlorides may not be used. 2.06 CURING MATERIALS

A. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B

1. Super Diamond Cleav VOX Euclid Chemical Co. 2. Kure-N-Seal-WB Sonneborn Building Products 3. VOCOMP-30 W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.07 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.



B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:

1. ALL UNEXPOSED CONCRETE (FOUNDATION WORK):

a. MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS: 3000 PSI b. MAXIMUM WATER CEMENT RATIO: 0.45 c. CEMENT CONTENT: 517 LB/CY (5 1/2 SACKS) use fly ash up to 25% of

cement material content d. SLUMP MINIMUM: 2" e. SLUMP MAXIMUM: 4"

2.08 CONCRETE MIXING A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Ready mixed concrete shall be delivered to work within 90 minutes after water added. When air temperature is above 90ºF, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, erect, brace and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 and ACI 347.

B. FORMS FOR EXPOSED SURFACES SHALL PRODUCE A SMOOTH SURFACE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS.

C. VERIFY ANCHORS, SEATS, PLATES, REINFORCEMENT, AND OTHER ITEMS TO BE CAST INTO CONCRETE ARE ACCURATELY PLACED, HELD SECURELY, AND WILL NOT CAUSE HARDSHIP IN PLACING CONCRETE.

D. MINIMIZE FORM JOINTS. SYMMETRICALLY ALIGN JOINTS AND MAKE WATERTIGHT TO PREVENT LEAKAGE OF MORTAR

E. ARRANGE AND ASSEMBLE FORMWORK TO PERMIT TRIPPING SO THAT CONCRETE IS NOT DAMAGED DURING ITS REMOVAL.

F. ARRANGE FORMS TO ALLOW STRIPPING WITHOUT REMOVAL OF PRINCIPLE SHORES, WHERE REQUIRED TO REMAIN IN PLACE.

G. PROVIDE BRACING TO ENSURE STABILITY OF FORMWORK. STRENGTHEN FORMWORK LIKELY TO BE OVER STRESSED BY CONSTRUCTION LOADS.

H. CAMBER SLABS AND BEAMS TO ACHIEVE ACI 301 TOLERANCES.

I. PROVIDE TEMPORARY PORTS IN FORMWORK TO FACILITATE CLEARING AND INSPECTION. LOCATE OPENINGS AT BOTTOM OF FORMS TO ALLOW FLUSHING WATER TO DRAIN. CLOSE PORTS WITH TIGHT FITTING PANELS, FLUSH WITH



INSIDE FACE OF FORMS, NEATLY FITTED SO THAT JOINTS WILL NOT BE APPARENT IN EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES.

J. PROVIDE CHAMFER STRIPS ON EXTERNAL CORNERS OF BEAMS, JOISTS, COLUMNS AND WALLS.

K. CONSTRUCT FORMWORK TO MAINTAIN TOLERANCES IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 301.

L. APPLY FORM RELEASE AGENT ON FORMWORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. APPLY PRIOR TO PLACING REINFORCING STEEL, , ANCHORING DEVICES AND EMBEDDED ITEMS.

M. DO NOT APPLY FORM RELEASE AGENT WHERE CONCRETE SURFACES ARE SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE SPECIAL FINISHES OR APPLIED COVERINGS, WHICH MAY BE AFFECTED BY AGENT. SOAK CONTACT SURFACES OF UNTREATED FORMS WITH CLEAN WATER. KEEP SURFACES WET PRIOR TO PLACING THE CONCRETE.

3.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for fabricating, placing and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor barrier. Repair damage and reseal vapor barrier before placing concrete.

2. CLEAN REINFORCEMENT OF FOREIGN PARTICLES OR COATINGS, BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE.

3. PLACE, SUPPORT, AND SECURE REINFORCEMENT AGAINST DISPLACEMENT. DO NOT DEVIATE FROM ALIGNMENT OR REQUIRED POSITION.

4. ACCOMMODATE PLACEMENT OF ALL FORMED OPENINGS OR CAST IN ITEMS.

5. STEEL REINFORCEMENT SHALL NOT BE STRAIGHTENED OR BENT IN A MANNER THAT WILL INJURE THE MATERIAL. NO HEATING OF BARS WILL BE PERMITTED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE ENGINEER.

6. NO CUTTING OR WELDING OF REINFORCING BARS WILL BE PERMITTED. 7. CHAIRS, INSERTS AND OTHER METAL DEVICES, WHERE EXPOSED AFTER

REMOVAL OF FORMS, SHALL HAVE EXPOSED SERVICES COATED WITH PLASTIC OR OTHER APPROVED RUST RESISTANT COATING.

8. REINFORCING FOR SLABS ON GRADE SHALL BE SUPPORTED. NO "PULLING UP" OF WIRE MESH DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE WILL BE PERMITTED.

9. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, MINIMUM LAP SPLICE LENGTHS ARE:

a. VERTICAL BARS IN WALLS, PIERS OR COLUMNS (INCLUDE DOWELS) - 30 DIAMETERS

b. HORIZONTAL BARS IN SLABS AND FOOTINGS - 35 DIAMETERS c. HORIZONTAL BARS IN WALLS - 45 DIAMETERS d. PROVIDE CORNER BARS AT WALL CORNERS TO MATCH

HORIZONTAL REINFORCING. MINIMUM LAP WITH HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT - 45 DIAMETERS



3.03 JOINTS

A. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. APPROVAL BY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REQUIRED FOR PLACING CONSTRUCTION JOINTS NOT SHOWN OF THE DRAWINGS.

C. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS IN CONCRETE SLABS ON GRADE AT A MAXIMUM SPACING OF 12'-0" ON CENTER UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS.

D. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS IN SIDEWALKS SPACED APPROXIMATELY 5'-0" ON CENTER AND EXPANSION JOINTS AT APPROXIMATELY 20'-0" ON CENTER. EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL ALSO OCCUR ADJACENT TO ALL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS IN PLACE WHEN WALKS ARE POURED.

E. CONTROL JOINTS MAY BE SAW CUT USING A 3/16 INCH THICK BLADE, CUTTING 1/3 INTO THE DEPTH OF THE SLAB THICKNESS. SAW CUT CONTROL JOINTS SHALL BE MADE NO SOONER THAN 4 HOURS AND NO LATER THAN 24 HOURS AFTER FINISHING IS COMPLETED.

3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS AND OPENINGS

A. PROVIDE FORMED OPENINGS WHERE REQUIRED FOR WORK EMBEDDED IN, OR PASSING THROUGH, CONCRETE.

B. COORDINATE WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS IN FORMING AND SETTING OPENINGS, SLOTS, RECESSES, CHASES, SLEEVES, BOLTS, ANCHORS AND OTHER INSERTS.

C. INSTALL ACCESSORIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS, LEVEL AND PLUMB. ENSURE ITEMS ARE NOT DISTURBED DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT.

3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at project site, or during placement.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.

3.05 FINISHING

A. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.



3.06 FINISHING SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open textured surface plane before excessive moisture or bleed water appears on the surface.

1. Do not disturb surfaces before starting finishing. C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping at second troweling.

Immediately after second troweling and while concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from

concrete surface. C. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a

combination of the following methods:

1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Floors not scheduled to receive floor covering shall receive an additional coat after concrete is thoroughly cleaned and just before occupancy.

3.08 FORM REMOVAL

A. DO NOT REMOVE FORMS AND SHORING UNTIL CONCRETE HAS SUFFICIENT STRENGTH TO SUPPORT ITS OWN WEIGHT AND CONSTRUCTION AND DESIGN LOADS WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED UPON IT.

B. RESHORE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS DUE TO DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OR CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS TO PERMIT SUCCESSIVE CONSTRUCTION.

C. DO NOT DAMAGE CONCRETE SURFACES DURING FORM REMOVAL. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: An independent testing and inspecting laboratory (Bowser Morner) will perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least three concrete test cylinders for each 75 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40° F and below or 80° F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi .



10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

15. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 24 hours of finishing.

END OF SECTION


UNIT MASONRY 04 2000-1

SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all masonry work, and related items, as shown on the plans, specified herein and/or necessary to properly complete the work.

B. The requirements of Specifications for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602)-95 published by the American Concrete Institute are hereby made a part of these specifications. Where discrepancies occur between standards, references and these Specifications the most stringent shall apply.

C. Related Sections

1. Lintels - Section 05 1100

D. Products installed, but not furnished under this Section.

1. Lintels- Section 05 1100

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compressive strength of masonry shall comply with f’m=2000 psi minimum.

B. Compressive strength shall be determined by the unit strength method using Tables in ACI 530.1.

C. Grout shall conform to requirements of ASTM C476. Fine and coarse grout proportions per Table 2103.10 OBC. Compressive strength f’m=2000 psi minimum.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals are required for specimens of masonry units showing range of color, texture and finish, design mix for mortar and test results, cold and hot weather protection proposed, manufacturer's literature, shop drawings, samples of non-masonry products, results of masonry tests, cleaning instructions and products.




A. All tests shall be performed by an Independent Testing Agency (Bowser Morner) under separate contract.

B. Provide certification from manufacturer of concrete masonry units, clay or shale masonry units by an independent testing laboratory verifying compressive tests, water absorption, saturation and efflorescence coefficient and where required, compliance with fire resistance rating as required by ASTM E119 requirements and as specified herein.

C. Provide certification from manufacturer or independent laboratory tests for mortar and grout mix designs.

D. Obtain each product from a single source to obtain uniform texture and color.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Concrete masonry units delivered to the job shall be stacked in a dry place, off the ground, on a prepared plank platform or wood flats, in a manner to promote circulation of air around and through the block. The stacked units shall be protected by a shed roof or tarpaulin. Units which are not stored as specified shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-140, and meet moisture limitations of ASTM C-90-90 prior to use. Such testing shall be at the Contractor's expense.

B. All units must be carefully handled at all times. Units with chipped edges, spalls, or other damage to their appearance, which would show in the finished walls, shall not be built into the work.

C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and discharging into mixing device. Store materials in a dry location.

D. Store reinforcement and metal accessories in a dry location.


A. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.

1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100ºF, or 90ºF with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type I (normal)

B. Hydrated Lime ASTM C207, Type S (Type N not acceptable)

C. Masons sand ASTM C144 Modified (not over 10% shall pass No. 100 sieve)

D. Mortar shall be tested in accordance with property specification of ASTM C270, Type S (below grade), Type N (for general use unless stated otherwise).

E. Pigments for colored mortar shall be natural or synthetic iron oxides or chromium oxides specially compounded for masonry mortar. Color as selected from manufacturers standard selection.

F. Lafarge Colored Mortars

G. Davis Colors

H. Solomon Colors

I. Preblended mortar will also be acceptable. All cementitious materials, aggregate, color additive and admixtures shall be blended in the factory under controlled conditions requiring only the addition of water at the site. Properties shall conform to those specified in this Section and shall be factory certified in writing. Acceptable products are Lafarge Mortar Mix, Spec Mix and Amerimix.

1. Contractor shall use preblended dispensing and storage equipment for concentrated dispensing of dry mix and shall follow manufacturer's instructions for use.

2.02 MASONRY MATERIALS

A. Concrete masonry units (CMU) shall be Normal weight, at least, 28 days old or cured by a steam process to meet ASTM C-90-Grade N-1. Two cell units with a minimum compressive strength of 1500 PSI on the gross area coverage of three units and shall have a total linear shrinkage of 0.03% or less. Units shall have a moisture content of not more than 30% of maximum absorption when delivered to the job site. Questionable units may be tested at contractor’s expense.

1. Concrete masonry units shall be free of carbonaceous materials and iron oxides to insure against staining or popping. Texture of lock shall be reasonably smooth and acceptable to the Architect before placement in structure.

2. Provide sizes as shown. Provide bullnose, jamb, bond beam, control joints and corner units as required. Use bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise noted.



B. Masonry lintels shall be prefabricated or precast concrete lintels as indicated on structural drawings.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND METAL ACCESSORIES

A. Reinforcing steel bar shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless otherwise noted.

B. Horizontal Reinforcing

1. Reinforcing for single wythe interior masonry shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-641, Class I, 0.40 oz. per sf.

2. Reinforcing for single wythe interior masonry walls shall be:LADUR Dur-O-Wal Inc.Ladder-Mesh 220 Hohmann & BarnardSeries 200 Masonry Reinforcing Corp of America

C. Welded wire fabric shall be plain conforming to ASTM A185.

D. Reinforcing bars shall be held in place with 9 gauge positioners and hot dipped galvanized.

1. AA 225 AA Wire ProductsD/A 811 Dur-O-Wal Inc.RB Hohmann & BarnardRebar Positioners National Wire

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint sealants are specified in Section 07 9200.

B. Miscellaneous Anchors:

1. Dovetail slots with filler strips of size indicated for inserting into concrete and fabricated of 1/16” galvanized sheet steel. Provide compatible insert anchors.

2. Anchor bolts headed or L shape as shown complying with ASTM A307 Grade A and with hex head nuts and flat washers. All hot dipped galvanized per ASTM A153.

3. Post-installed anchors, chemical or torque controlled expansion type with capacity to withstand without failure a load equal to six times load imposed in solid or grouted unit masonry or four times when installed in concrete.

2.05 MIXING MORTAR

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270.

B. When weather is such as to cause drying out of the mortar, batch size shall be such that all material will be used within two (2) hours.



C. Mortar on the board shall be kept well tempered with water, so long as its cementing material has not started to set, so that it will be soft and workable when placed in the wall. Mortar shall not be re-tempered in the mortar box or mixer at any time, and re-tempering of mortar on the board shall be avoided if "initial set" of cementing material has been reached or mortar has stiffened greatly. Re-tempering of mortar used to set stone is not permitted.

D. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Prefabricated masonry lintels or precast concrete lintels required. See Structural Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall construct first masonry work in the presence of the Architect's Representative. Procedure and finished product for remainder of building shall follow approved section of work in every respect. The Architect reserves the right to order non-complying work removed and replaced correctly at no additional cost.

3.02 MASONRY ERECTION

A. Lay masonry in running bond pattern.

B. Interior exposed masonry concrete units shall be tooled nearly flush with block.

C. Fill core solid around anchor bolts and expansion bolts. Unless otherwise shown provide solid units or 100% filled units for three courses under beams and two courses under lintels.

D. Head joints shall be buttered. Slushing not permitted.

E. Contractor shall install embedded items and accessories. Coordinate work with mechanical and electrical trades, and provide openings where required. Provide all chases and recesses, and built in grounds. Set steel lintels in beds of mortar. Fill solid with mortar around jambs and heads of metal door bucks and frames. Note that inside of door frames must be field painted before installation. Accurately place anchor bolts and grout in full depth of bolt in masonry. See roofing membrane section for placement of roof perimeter anchor bolts where applicable.

F. Pipes and conduit passing through masonry walls shall pass through steel sleeves. Sleeves shall be sealed with mortar. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide and install sleeves.



3.03 REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. Reinforcing shall be placed into the full bed of mortar and seated by frequent lifting of cross rods. The top course and the first two courses above and below wall openings shall be reinforced, extending 24" beyond opening. Walls shall be reinforced 16" o.c. For splices, side rod joints shall be lapped 6". Corners and partition intersections shall be similarly reinforced with special pieces or rods bent in such a manner that joints do not occur closer than 24" from corner.

B. Provide dowels from footing, grade beam, or concrete walls below, same size and spacing of wall bars, lap 12” minimum with wall bar. Imbed into footing, grade beam, or concrete wall below 9”.

C. Provide bar alignment devices at a maximum spacing of 9 bar diameters (min. 2 per bar0.

D. All reinforcement must be installed and securely anchored in place prior to placement of grout.

E. Maximum height of grout lift shall be 5 feet.

F. All concrete masonry units used in reinforced masonry shall be two cell units.

3.04 GROUT PLACEMENT

A. Grout in reinforcing bars per ACI 350.1. Bar splices 36 bar diameters or as required by OBC. Use bar connectors for large diameter bars. Provide galvanized metal Rebar positioners as necessary to keep bars centered in masonry cores. Follow code for space between bars.

B. Use fine grout for cores, coarse grout for bond beams.

3.05 CLEANING

A. At completion of masonry work, remove loose mortar, stains, efflorescence, fill holes and repoint as necessary. Clean by scrubbing with fiber brushes and a mild alkaline abrasive cleaner that contains no harsh or caustic fillers. Acid solutions shall be used only with written permission of the Architect and only in extreme cases where usual cleaning cannot be obtained. Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned to original manufactured appearance.

B. High pressure water cleaning is not acceptable.

END OF SECTION


STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 1100-1

SECTION 051100 - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all structural steel, including columns, beams, girders, connections, shear connectors, and all other items of structural steel shown on drawings or necessary for completion of the work.

B. Anchor bolts, lintels, loose bearing and leveling plates, and anchorage devices which are

embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry construction shall be provided by this Contractor and delivered for timely placement by others. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation.

C. Related Sections

1. Metal Fabrications - Section 05 5000 2. Finish Painting - Section 09 9100

D. Testing work by independent laboratory (Bowser Morner) under separate contract. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A-36 - Specification for Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plate and Bar.

B. ASTM A-53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless.

C. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality.

C. ASTM A-123 - Specification for Zinc (hot galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

D. ASTM A-153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (hot dipped) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

E. ASTM A-500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

F. ASTM A-307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.



G. ASTM A-325 – Type I - Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, ASTM A563 Suitable Nuts and ASTM F436 Plain Hardened Washers.

H. ASTM A-653 – Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated by Hot Dip Method.

I. ASTM A-992 – Specification for Wide Flange Beams.

J. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction - Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. Ninth Edition.

K. AWS D1.1 - American Welding Society Structural Welding Code - Steel.

L. Steel Structures Painting Council – Surface Preparation Specifications.

M. The most stringent requirement shall govern where there are discrepancies between the references, standards, and this specification.

N. Revisions to AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (dated 9-1-86). Number in ( ) denotes section referenced in Code of Standard Practice.

1. (1.2) Owner shall be as defined in General Conditions. 2. (1.5.2) These specifications define certain design responsibilities of the Contractor. 3. Delete 3.3, 4.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 7.15 4. (5.2.3) All stock substitutions shall be approved by the Architect. Any submittal for a

stock substitution shall be accompanied by a mill certificate. 5. (6.3.2) Remove all weld runoff tabs. Grind tabs flush with surrounding steel. Grind all

flame cut edges smooth. 6. (7.3, 7.4, 7.5.1, 7.5.4, 7.5.3, 7.6, 7.11.5, 7.13) Revise "Owner" to "Contractor". 7. (8.5.4) Delete second sentence. 8. Delete 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.3.

1.04 SOURCE LIMITATION

A. Domestic steel use requirements as specified in the Ohio Revised Code apply to this project. Only materials identified as produced in the United States will be accepted. Copies of Section 053.011 can be obtained at the Ohio Department of Administrative Services. The first sheet of steel shop drawings shall bear a signed certification that no foreign steel is being used.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, as required, indicating all shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners, rivets and welds. Shop drawings shall state the type of connections and welding electrodes to be used. Take field dimensions to insure proper fit of structural steel.



B. Review of shop drawings will be for size and arrangement of members and type of connection only. Correctness of dimension and compliance to contract drawings remains the responsibility of the Contractor. Take field dimensions as necessary to provide proper fit to conditions at time of erection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. While most of the structural steel for this project is called for on the Structural Drawings, items of structural steel may also be called for on other Contract Drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Fabricator and Detailer to provide each item of structural steel called for in all drawings.

B. Where discrepancies exist among these drawings with respect to structural steel size,

location, elevation, slope, dimension or other pertinent information, the Design Engineer shall be notified. Detailing of such items shall not proceed until the discrepancy is resolved.

C. Structural steel frames are to be provided at all openings 18” or larger in any dimension

through the roof. The Fabricator and Detailer are advised that the structural plans may not show all openings. Check other Contract Drawings for the size and location of openings and to provide appropriate framing.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Structural steel shapes, plates, bars shall conform to ASTM A-36 and ASTM A572 Grade 50.

B. Structural piping shall conform to ASTM A-53, Grade B.

C. Structural tubes shall conform to ASTM A-500, Grade B.

D. Steel bolts shall conform to ASTM A325. Bolt head identification required. Nuts conform

to ASTM A-194, washers conform to ASTM F-436-90. E. Cold rolled steel shall conform to ASTM A653, 16 gauge or heavier 50 ksi or 33 ksi as

required; 18 gauge or lighter 33 ksi minimum. F. Provide steel lintels at every place where openings are necessary in masonry walls where

shown on drawings or not. See typical lintel schedule on structural drawings for size. Lintels in exterior walls shall be galvanized conforming to ASTM A-123.

G. All structural steel, pipe or tubes exposed to the weather shall be galvanized conforming to

ASTM A-123. All bolts, nuts and washers in galvanized material shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A-153. Minimum weight of galvanizing for structural shapes, plates, bars and fabricated assemblies shall be 2.0 oz. per square foot for steel 1/4” or thicker. Steel less than 1/4” shall be 1.8 oz. per square foot.



H. Electrodes for welding structural steel shall conform to the requirements for filler metal and

flux as specified in AWS D1.1, with the classification selected subject to approval by the Architect.

I. Touch up galvanizing and regalvanizing welds shall be a high quality zinc base paint such as Z.R.C. Galvilite.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. All work shall conform to all applicable parts within AISC Manual of Steel Construction including connections, specifications and codes unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings or specified herein.

B. The best shop practices shall be followed for shearing, punching, diameter of bolt holes,

spacing, welding, etc., in addition to conformance with AISC Specification. Burning holes for bolts, conduit, hangers, etc. is not permitted.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fit of structural members to conditions

existing at the time of erection. D. The structural steel shall have provisions for the attachment of other building components

including such items as threaded fasteners, anchors, plates, masonry inserts and ties, bolts and screws. Coordinate work with other Contractors.

E. All members shall be free from twists, kinks, buckles, or open joints. Parts assembled with

bolts shall be in close contact except where separators are required. All members shall be so accurately made that the parts shall come together and bolts enter without distortion when assembled.

F. Tubular or box sections shall be completely seal welded at all joints, seams, splices, and

ends. G. Steel to steel bearing surfaces shall be planed to true beds. Abutting surfaces shall be

closely fitted. All column and bearing stiffeners shall be milled for full bearing over their cross section.

H. Erection seats, if used, shall not interfere with architectural clearances or visible in finished

work. I. Errors in accurate hole placing shall be corrected by reaming. Burning of holes shall not

be permitted. J. Slotted holes must be finished by reaming to proper dimensions. Feather edges will not be

accepted. K. Welding shall be done by operators who have been previously qualified by tests as

prescribed in the AWSD.1, Section 5, Qualification.



L. Provide web stiffeners where necessary at reaction points in cold rolled joists, also end support to prevent rotation.

2.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Shop connections shall be welded or bolted. B. Field connections shall be bolted with ASTM A-325 3/4” diameter bolts, unless otherwise

noted or detailed on the drawings. C. All bolted and welded connections shall be in accordance with the data and tables in the

AISC Manual of Steel Construction. Shear type connections for beams shall be designed to support one-half of the maximum total uniform load capacity of the beam at spans shown on the drawings, as a minimum. All connections shall be bearing-type connections, unless otherwise noted.

D. Welding equipment shall be of sufficient capacity and in good working condition, capable of

adjustment in full range of current settings.

E. Do not begin welding until elements to be welded are held securely in place and adjusted to dimensions shown on the drawings.

F. Control of shrinkage and distortion in all welds shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

2.05 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate from steel angles and shapes as shown or required. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit. Size lintels for bearing at each end of 1/12 of span but not less than 8” unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

2.06 LOOSE BEARING PLATES

A. Provide steel plates for bearing and leveling on masonry or concrete. Drill to receive anchor bolts and grout. Prime finish after drilling.

2.07 FINISHES

A. Structural metal which is intended to be encased in concrete or to be covered with field applied sprayed fireproofing shall be solvent cleaned and cleaned by SSPC-SP2 hand tool cleaning method.

B. Structural metal not otherwise finished shall be prepared and prime painted as follows.

1. Clean by SSPC-SP3 power tool cleaning method. 2. Apply one coat primer of iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil and alkyd conforming to

SSPC-Paint 25 Type II.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION

A. All structural steel shall be furnished, fabricated, delivered and erected as specified herein or shown on drawings to the requirements of regulatory agencies.

B. Materials, equipment or other loads shall be applied in a manner and location such that no

portion of the structure is over loaded. Provide bracing or shoring where required. C. Furnish adequate guys and/or temporary bracing to hold work in place until final

connections are made. Anchor bolts at columns are not designed to provide stability during frame erection.

D. No final bolting or welding shall be done until that portion of the structure has been properly

aligned. E. All structural members shall be level, plumb and/or aligned within the tolerances permitted

in AISC “Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings” and “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”

F. Erection bolts shall not be used on exposed surfaces. Erection bolts, stiffeners, etc., shall

not interfere with architectural clearances. G. All finished surfaces shall be protected during the progress of welding. Any damaged part

of surface shall be replaced by this Contractor without cost to the Owner. Touch up paint and galvanizing immediately after erection to prevent rust or further deterioration.

H. Field errors shall not be corrected by burning.

3.03 TESTING

A. An independent testing and inspection laboratory (Bowser Morner) shall perform the following duties:

1. Inspect all bolted connections. Loose bolts shall be tightened to the required minimum tension.

2. The minimum bolt tension, method of tightening, and method of inspecting installed bolts shall be as specified in “Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” and the Commentary that follows.

3. All shop and field welded connections shall be visually inspected. 4. The testing and inspection laboratory shall be notified in advance so that preliminary

inspection of fit-ups of members can be made. 5. In each connection, 20% of the length of the welds at the top flange, the bottom flange

and at the web, shall be checked by the ultrasonic test technique, or by other approved non-destructive test method.

6. Any weld that is suspected to be defective by visual inspection, shall be checked by ultrasonic testing, or other approved method.



B. The cost of any additional testing or inspection required as a result of errors by this

Contractor, shall also be paid for by this Contractor. C. This Contractor shall cooperate with the testing and inspection laboratory in their

performance of duties and render physical assistance for same, as may be necessary. END OF SECTION


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 1

SECTION 05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Exterior load-bearing roof framing.

B. Related Sections:

1. Masonry Shelf Angles and Connections - Section 05 11002. Interior Non-Load-Bearing, Metal-Stud Framing - Section 09 500


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated on structural drawings.2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without

deflections greater than the following:

a. Exterior Load-Bearing Roof Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the height.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."



1.04 SOURCE LIMITATION

A. Domestic steel use requirements as specified in the Ohio Revised Code apply to this project. Only materials identified as produced in the United States will be accepted. Copies of Section 053.011 can be obtained at the Ohio Department of Administrative Services. The first sheet of steel shop drawings shall bear a signed certification that no foreign steel is being used.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency

indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing by one of the following:

1. Dale/Incor.2. Dietrich Metal Framing: A Worthington Industries Company.3. Marino Ware; a division of Ware Industries.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H or ST50H. As required by structural performance.

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection. Clips: ASTM A 653, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.2. Coating: G40.

2.03 LOAD-BEARING ROOF FRAMING

A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0625 inch.2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel joists.2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

2.05 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:



1. Supplementary framing.2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.3. Web stiffeners.4. Anchor clips.5. End clips.6. Gusset plates.7. Joist hangers and end closures.8. Hole reinforcing plates.9. Backer plates.

2.06 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035.Select appropriate grout from first two paragraphs below if concrete or masonry substrates require leveling before setting track or prefabricated assemblies.

B. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.



2.08 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.2 PREPARATION

A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of bottom track or rim track and the top of wall at joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.



B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

2.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.



2.4 JOIST INSTALLATION

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist

hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:

1. Joist Spacing: As indicated.

D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.

E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings.

1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

F. Install bridging at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:

1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.

G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.

2.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: A qualified independent testing and inspecting agency (Bowser Morner) shall perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports under separate contract.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.



D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

2.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-1

SECTION - 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes but not limited to the following:

1. Anchor bolts2. Cast-in-concrete anchors.

B. Related Sections

1. Unit Masonry - Section 04 2000

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A-27 - Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application.

B. ASTM A-36 - Specification for Structural Steel.

C. ASTM A-53 – Specification for Carbon Steel Pipe.

D. ASTM A-500 - Grade B - Specification for Cold Formed Seamless Steel Tubes.

E. ASTM A-123-84 - Specification for Zinc (hot dipped galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

F. ASTM A-666 Type 304 – Specification for Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Bar and Plate.

G. AWS - American Welding Society - Structural Welding Code.AWS D1.1 – SteelAWS D1.3 – Sheet Steel

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings of all metal items. The drawings shall show type and sizes of metal, method of assembly, hardware and anchorage or connection to other work.



B. Furnish all necessary templates and patterns necessary for installation of work by this Contractor and by other Contractors on the project. This Contractor shall be responsible for proper placement of these items in the work.

C. Field measure for hanging support steel and other items to obtain proper fit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Refer to structural general notes sheet for grade of material.

2.02 FASTENERS

A. Provide all bolts, screws, washers, anchors, straps, fasteners, and similar items as shown on the drawings, or as required to complete the work.

1. Items fastening galvanized items will also be galvanized.2. Items for exterior use shall be Type 304 stainless steel.3. Cast-in-place anchors in concrete shall be galvanized threaded or wedge type

capable of sustaining without failure a load equal to four times the imposed load.4. Expansion anchors galvanized for interior use and stainless steel for exterior use

and capable of sustaining without failure a load equal to six times the imposed load in masonry and four times in concrete.

2.04 FINISHES

A. All ferrous metal shall be properly cleaned by commercial blast cleaning SSPC-SP6 and given two coats of shop primer in accordance with owner’s requirements.

B. Anchors that are built into masonry or concrete shall be coated with asphalt paint.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Metal work shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces. Members in contact shall be welded, unless otherwise specified. Screws and bolts shall not be used in assembling where it can be avoided.

B. Provide the necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so that the work can be assembled in a neat, substantial manner. Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled. Shearing and punching shall leave clean, true lines and surfaces. Fastenings shall be concealed where possible. Thickness of metals and details of assembling and support shall give ample strength and stiffness. Built-up parts shall be out of wind. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water.



C. Metal work shall be properly countersunk to receive the required hardware and provided with the proper bevels or clearances.

D. Preassemble items in shop as much as possible.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously with exposed welds smooth and blended into adjoining

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.02 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers’ written instructions and requirements indicated on shop drawings.



3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mil) dry film thickness.

END OF SECTION


ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-1

SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all rough carpentry work, including but not limited to the following.

1. Wood blocking, furring and grounds.

B. Related Sections

1. Finish Carpentry - Section 062000

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee

B. AWPA - American Wood Preservers Association

C. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction

D. OBC - Ohio Building Code

E. WWPA – Western Wood Products Association

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings of all mill fabricated or manufactured items. Contractor shall be responsible for verification of field dimensions, job conditions and adjustments of his work to meet conditions.

B. Certification that wood preservative treatment complies with requirement and stating type and amount retained.

C. Certification that wood treated with fire retardant materials complies with requirements based on independent testing of physical properties.

D. For dimension lumber state species, grade and allowable unit stresses for each use required as approved by ALSC Review. Submit joist and beam layouts, details for



hangers and headers. Provide instruction for installation and field cut restrictions and cautions.

E. Submit product data for each composite wood product used indicating that bonding agent used did not contain urea formaldehyde.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STANDARDS

A. Lumber shall be properly seasoned, moisture content about 19%, free from warp and shall be cut to size shown on drawings or as necessary to complete the work. Lumber shall be machine finished. Protect all lumber from injury and dampness.

B. All lumber dressed S4S unless otherwise noted.

C. Lumber Standards and Grade Stamps: PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard and inspection agency grade stamps.

D. Construction Panel Standards: PS 1, U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood; APA PRP-108.

E. Dimension Lumber: No. 2 grade or better

2.02 CONNECTIONS

A. All connections shall be fabricated with approved timber connectors, bolts, lag screws, spikes, nails, adhesive or other approved connecting device. Bolted connections shall be snugged up tightly without crushing wood fibers under washers. All nailed connections shall meet not less than the minimum requirements of the Ohio Building Code.

B. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in contact with ground or areas of high humidity, fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized.

2.03 PRESSURE TREATED WOOD

A. Where pressure treated wood is required it shall be AWPA certified for species, product, preservative and end use and equal to Wolmanized Natural Select. Wood shall be kiln dried after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 15% for plywood. Use hot dipped galvanized bolts, screws, and nails. Lumber shall have quality mark of accredited inspection agency.

B. Wood in contact with concrete slabs on grade and areas described in OBC 2304.11 shall be pressure treated.



C. All lumber treatment shall be licensed by retardant manufacturer.



D. Plywood: APA C-D Plugged Exposure 1 with exterior glue, fire-retardant treated, shall be used at electrical and telephone equipment backing panels and where required for shear strength or other properties.

2.04 FIRE RETARDANT WOOD

A. Fire retardant lumber and plywood where required, shall be pressure impregnated with chemical by a pressure process in accordance with AWPA C20 (lumber) or AWPA C27 (plywood) to provide a flame spread, fuel contributed and smoke developed classification of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. There shall be no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the 10 minute test is extended to 20 minutes.

B. Each piece of lumber or plywood shall bear the mark of a third party accrediting testing agency. The fire retardant chemicals shall be free of Halogen, sulfate, ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde. The treated lumber shall remain dry, below fiber saturation, in relative humidity exposures up to 95%. After treatment all one and two inch lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19%. All plywood kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15%.

C. Fire retardant lumber and plywood shall be treated with Dricon FRT or Hoover Pyro-Guard.

D. Use hot dipped galvanized fasteners in fire retardant wood.

E. All lumber treatment shall be licensed by retardant manufacturer.

F. Do not rip or mil treated lumber. Only end cuts, drilling holes and joining cuts are permitted.

2.05 BLOCKING, FURRING, GROUNDS

A. Provide wood blocking for support of shelves, grab bars, markerboards, tackboards, monitors, etc. Wall hung cabinets shall have blocking and 18 gauge metal strapping for support.

B. Blocking for construction attachment shall be select. All other applications shall be any grade which will not interfere with attachment.

C. Wood in non-combustible construction shall be fire retardant treated wood.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. All carpentry shall be neatly done, in accordance with drawings and specifications.



Work shall be level, plumb and with square corners. Allow for expansion of lumber. Warped or twisted lumber shall not be used.



B. Wood fasteners shall conform to OBC Table 2304.9.1 as minimum requirements. Staples not permitted except by special permission of the Architect.

END OF SECTION


CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06 2000-1

SECTION 06 2000 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all carpentry, shelving and millwork as specified herein and shown on the drawings. Install hardware and specialties specified elsewhere.

B. Quartz Countertops

C. Window sills to match existing facility standard.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ADA - American with Disabilities Act

B. ALSC - American Lumber Standard Committee

C. APA - American Plywood Association

D. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute

E. AWPA - American Wood Preservers Association

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for review, shop drawings of all mill fabricated or manufactured items before beginning work. Contractor shall be responsible for verification of dimensions, job conditions and adjustments of his work to meet conditions.

B. Verify mounting heights with ADA requirements.

C. Submit samples of plastic laminate and PVC edge material for verification of color selection. Provide drawing showing panel layout and attachment methods.




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90° F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STANDARDS

A. Lumber shall be properly seasoned, moisture content about 19%, free from warp and shall be cut to size shown on drawings or as necessary to complete the work. Lumber shall be machine finished. Protect all lumber from injury and dampness. All structural lumber shall be identified by the grade mark of a lumber grading or inspection agency certified by the ALSC.

B. Plywood, oriented strand board (OBS) and composite panels shall be produced under the provisions of Voluntary Product Standard PS2-93 Performance Based Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.

C. Panels shall be marked with the APA trademark showing panel thickness, panel grade, span rating and exposure durability.

2.02 WOOD PRODUCTS

A. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.

B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

D. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density.

E. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.

F. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.

G. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

1. Provide PVC edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges (on casework only).

H. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:

1. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.2. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.3. Pionite, Panolam, Industries.4. Formica Corporation.



2.03 PRESSURE TREATED WOOD

A. Where pressure treated wood is required it shall be AWPA certified and equal to Wolmanized or Natural Select. Wood shall be kiln dried after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 15% for plywood. Use hot dipped galvanized bolts, screws, and nails. Lumber shall be labeled certifying kiln drying and treatment.

B. Wood in contact with concrete slabs on grade and areas described in OBC 2304.11 shall be pressure treated.

C. All lumber treatment shall be licensed by retardant manufacturer.

2.04 BLOCKING

A. Provide wood blocking or studs for support of cabinets, shelves, grab bars, toilet room accessories, hooks, etc. Wall hung cabinets shall have studs fully supported and extend from sill to plate. Provide framing around recessed items.

B. Contractor shall carefully examine wall mounted items or shop drawings and provide blocking to receive each and every screw or bolt necessary to secure items to wall. Verify mounting height of each item in order to permit accurate placing in conformance with drawings and / or ADA requirements. Blocking shall be securely fastened, flat and nearly flush with studs to prevent any unnecessary strain on the plaster wall when accessory is attached.

2.05 SHELVING

A. Wall hung shelving shall have adjustable 3/4" particle board shelves with plastic laminate or pressure fused laminate on top, bottom and front edge surfaces. Support shelves on KV 87WH shelf standards and KV 187WH shelf brackets. Secure shelf to bracket with 210WH and 211WH shelf supports screwed to bottom of shelf.

2.06 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Standard, or as indicated on Finish Schedule.

B. Countertop Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3mm.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated on Finish Schedule.

D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application where defined on plans.



E. Edge: eased edge profile.

F. MU – Standards - Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin.

2.07 WINDOW SILLS

A. Provide new window sills to match Facility Standard. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. See Finishes Schedule Notes for locations.

2.08 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”.

B. Hinges: 100-125 degree; adjustable, self-closing; steel nickel-plated.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, aluminum or stainless steel, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04081; metal, L-shape type with single pin anchor.

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091,integral style; full-extension type; epoxy-coated steel with steel ball-bearings of the following grades:

1. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf.2. File Drawer Slides: 200 lbf.

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. All doors to be lockable.

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. All drawers to be lockable.

J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 3-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chrome: BHMA 626.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

M. Exposed Countertop Brackets: Steel brackets with L-shaped cross-section., reversible for 24 inch deep or 30 inch deep countertops. Manufacturer’s complete color options.



1. Product. A & M Hardware, Inc. or approved equivalent.

N. Locks and Keys: Provide six (6) keys per room. Each room to be keyed separately, all locks in each room keyed alike. Provide corresponding number (manufacturer’s coding) engraved on both key and lock.

O. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

P. Bar Foot Rail: Keg Works Oil Rubbed Bronze Tube – 2” OD bar foot rail with 90 degree post foot rail bracket with end caps.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips:

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate and Bonding Edges: As recommended by manufacturer of plastic laminate.

2.10 MILLWORK

A. Millwork cabinets shall be "flush overlay" type design and conform to AWI Quality Standards, Custom Grade. Millwork includes counters, cabinets and cubbies.

B. Exposed lumber shall be custom grade birch or oak to match other construction. Concealed lumber shall be hardwood or dense softwood. Framing lumber and blocking shall be standard grade softwood.

C. Cabinet doors and drawer fronts shall have pre-finished melamine particleboard backs with "General Purpose Grade," plastic laminate front and edges.

D. Cabinet body shall be constructed of particleboard with melamine coating on the interior



surfaces of the cabinet. Exposed exterior surfaces shall be "Vertical Grade" plastic laminate, including exposed interior of open shelf cabinets, and knee space.

E. Shelves shall have "General Purpose Grade" plastic laminate covered top face and edges. Bottom face may be melamine or plastic laminate if they are not exposed.

2.11 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS

A. Generally consisting of natural quartz particles, reacted monomers and resins, pigments and various performance-enhancing additives manufactured as slabs of various specific calipers. Quartz surface materials are solid, non-porous and homogeneous and exhibit strength, hardness and durability; meeting following criteria:

1. Flammability: Flame Spread Value (FSV): ≤5 and Smoke Development Value (SDV): ≤40 when tested to CAN/ULC-S102 for 2 cm (3/4") and FSV: 0 and SDV: ≤ 10 when tested to CAN/ULC-S102 for 3 cm (1-1/4").

2.12 FABRICATION - GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Install laminated plastic in single pieces up to the limits of the sheet sizes; small patches will not be accepted.

C. Grade: Custom.

D. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

E. AWI Construction Style: Style B.

F. AWI Construction Type: Type I, multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together.

G. AWI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.

H. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch.

I. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS .050-inch normal thickness.2. Post-formed Surfaces: Grade HGP .042-inch normal thickness.3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS .029-inch normal thickness.4. Edges: 3mm PVC for door and drawer edges and 1mm at all other locations. Color

match laminate in color, pattern, and finish. Not allowed at countertops.

J. Materials:

1. Door/Drawer Thicknesses



a. Back and sides: ½”b. Fronts: ¾”

2. Cabinet Thicknesses

a. Bottom: ¾”b. Sides: ¾”c. Wall Cabinet Tops: ¾”d. Sub-Tops: ½”e. Backs: 3/8”

3. Shelves

a. 12” Deep or less: ¾”b. 12” Deep or more: 1”

K. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

L. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces as defined on the finish schedule.

M. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

N. Base of cabinets to be individual bases installed at factory.

O. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

P. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch.

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.

Q. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check



measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

R. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

S. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with with butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and pre-fitted, concealed metal splines.

1. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch thick, with rounded edge and corners, and with drip groove and integral coved backsplash.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. All carpentry shall be neatly done, in accordance with drawings and specifications. Work shall be level, plumb and with square corners. Allow for expansion of lumber. Warped or twisted lumber shall not be used.

B. Verify openings required by other trades before proceeding.

3.02 INSTALLATION - MILLWORK

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.



F. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

G. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

H. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c.

I. Quartz Countertops Comply with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of ANSI/ICPA SS-1 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

J. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c.

K. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

L. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION


INSULATION 07 2100-1

SECTION - 07 2100 INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide building insulation

B. Related Sections

1. Cold-Formed Metal Framing - Section 05 4000

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E2357

B. ASTM E283

C. ASTM E331

D. ASTM E96

E. ABAA – Air Barrier Association of America

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide name and descriptive literature of product selected for each application. Submit size, thickness, "R" value and certification that product complies with fire rating and other requirements specified.

B. Provide written confirmation that roofing insulation are acceptable to Roofing Membrane Manufacturer for full system guarantee.


A. Deliver product in weather resistant packaging.


INSULATION 07 2100-2

B. Store in a clean dry area preferable inside building. Roof insulation shall be stored on wood flats and securely wrapped in watertight covers. Inspect covers on roof insulation every day when stored on roof. Wet insulation, even if dried, is not permitted to be used.

C. Protect insulation from physical damage.

D. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for handling, storage and protection.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. N/A

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOUND INSULATION

A. Unfaced fiberglass sound batts 3 1/2" thick, complying with ASTM C665, Type I.

1. Sound Control Batts Certainteed Corporation2. Sound Attenuation Batts Owens Corning3. Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Batts U.S.G. Corp.4. Sound Shield Johns Manville

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 BATT INSULATION

A. Batt insulation shall be placed with vapor barrier toward the warm side and secured as per manufacturer's recommendations. Where insulation is extended above ceilings provide wire mesh or wire to hold insulation between studs unless wall board extends full height of stud.

END OF SECTION


CAULKING AND SEALANTS 07 9210-1

SECTION 07 9200 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all caulking, sealants, primers, backer rods, bond breaker tape as necessary to seal joints between materials.

1. Construction joints in cast-in-place and precast concrete.2. Perimeter joints around windows, doors, louvers.3. Brick control and expansion joints.4. Joints between curtain wall and masonry.5. Control and sealing joints specified in other Sections.6. Horizontal exterior traffic joints.

B. Related Sections

1. Glazing Compounds - Section 08 80002. Acoustic Sealant at Stud Walls- Section 09 2500

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit color samples.

B. Submit name of all products to be used and location of where each is to be used. Submit product data sheets including statement of VOC content, MSDS, test data and specific instructions for installation.


A. Only experienced, qualified workers shall prepare surfaces and apply sealants or caulking. Workers shall have a minimum of 5 years experience.

B. Sealants shall be checked for compatibility with adjoining materials. A test section which is applied and checked after a week or extended period of time shall be done on all materials of questionable compatibility. Manufacturer of sealants and of materials in contact with sealant shall be consulted for proper preparation and installation. Consultation with manufacturer of certain materials such as precast concrete is recommended for such items as form release contamination and surface condition.



Written reports required.

C. On site tests for adhesion shall be performed in the presence of Owners Representative. Tests shall be performed at joints at each type of material to be sealed and periodically as directed.


A. Surfaces exposed to the exterior shall be applied when ambient temperatures are

between 40 to 90F, d dry and free of contamination, moisture or frost unless recommended otherwise in writing by sealant Manufacturer.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. The General Contractor primarily and Sealant Installer secondarily shall replace at no cost to the Owner, any or all joints which fail within 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INTERIOR CAULKING

A. General purpose acrylic latex compatible with latex and oil paints conforming to not less than ASTM C - 834.

1. Sonolac, acrylic latex caulk Degussa, Sonneborn Division.2. Tremflex -834 Tremco Manufacturing Company.3. AC-20 Acrylic Latex Pecora Corporation.

B. Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Sealants: 250 g/l.2. Sealants Primers for Nonporous Substraits: 250 g/l.3. Sealants Primers for Porous Substraits: 775 g/l.

2.02 EXTERIOR SEALANTS

A. Non-sag, low modulus polyurethane rubber 25% movement. Minimum compliance with ASTM C-920 Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Sonolastic NP II Degussa, Sonneborn Division.2. Dynatrol II Pecora Corporation.3. Dymeric, 240/240FC Tremco Manufacturing Company.

B. Provide primer as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer.



C. All exterior sealants and joints noted as caulking on drawings on the exterior of building shall be the sealant specified in paragraph A.

2.03 BACKER ROD

A. Closed cell polyethylene joint filler with 25% Compression.

1. Eathafoam SB Dow Corning Corporation.2. Everlastic Gaskets Williams Products, Inc.3. Closed Cell Backer-Rod Degussa, Sonneborn Division.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Joints shall be sound, smooth, clean and dry; free of frost, dust, loose mortar or other contaminants such as form release agents, retarders or sealers. Wipe pre-cast concrete surfaces with a cloth dampened with an oil free solvent such as xylol. Very shinny concrete surfaces may have a "skin" on the surface which must be removed by wire brushing, grinding or similar mechanical abrading methods.

B. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.02 TESTING

A. Test sealant application at beginning of work and again where conditions of materials or weather change significantly. Allow sealant to cure to tack free before testing. Test by making a horizontal cut across sealant and with a sharp knife slice down between sealant and both walls for a distance of about 2”. Lift sealant flap out and pull down. Successful application will tear the sealant. Improper adhesion will cause sealant to zipper out and away from wall.

B. Where sealant fails remove sealant, prime or otherwise prepare surface as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer and re-seal. Repeat test until satisfactory results are obtained.

3.03 BACKER ROD

A. Use backer rod to prevent three sided adhesion. Where space restricts use of backer rod use an adhesive backed polyethylene bondbreaker tape. Back up rods shall be of proper size to allow 25% compression. Avoid stretching, twisting or braiding of tube. Insert with blunt tool to avoid puncturing skin of rod. Select a backer rod about 1/8” larger in diameter than the joint for openings up to 3/4” wide. For joints wider than 3/4” use a rod 1/4” larger in diameter than the joint.



3.04 PRIMER

A. Prime all surfaces recommended by Sealant Manufacturer. Certain surfaces such as anodized aluminum require primer. Follow manufacturer’s instructions regarding mixing, application, timing and shelf life. Protect adjacent surfaces from stains or damage from primer.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Where joint is deeper than 3/4", it shall be filled with a backer rod to within 3/4" of the surface. Sealant shall be about 3/8" deep unless joint is wider than 1/2". In such case, sealant depth shall be 50% of width.

B. Caulking gun shall be of proper size and should provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joint. After filling tool joints to a neat smooth concave surface. Clean excess sealant from surrounding work before material has had time to cure.

C. All joints and spaces shall be completely filled with compound, forming a neat, smooth bead, free of wrinkles or voids.

D. Control joints and expansion joints, both interior and exterior, shall be caulked with exterior sealant.

END OF SECTION


STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1100-1

SECTION 08 1100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all hollow metal doors, pressed steel door and window frames, and all necessary anchors and appliances. Prepare to receive hardware.

B. Prepare door frames for and provide boxes to receive electrical door hardware and access control devices.

C. Related Sections

1. Wood Doors - Section 08 21102. Finish Hardware - Section 08 71003. Glass and Glazing - Section 08 80004. Field Painting - Section 09 9100

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings showing each type of door, swing, jamb, size, frame conditions, anchors, glass opening, hardware preparation and uncoated steel thickness. Show bottom clip detail.

B. Show detailed field splices where required.

C. Submit samples of jamb-head corner and corner of door. Show hinge reinforcing, bottom edge and sound deadening of door.

D. Hardware Contractor shall furnish templates.


A. Doors and frames designated to be labeled shall be constructed to the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and shall bear labels for the class of opening required. Label for rating shall be riveted to door and frame and attached at place of manufacturer.

B. Life Safety Code NFPA-101



C. Fire Door and Window Frame Assemblies NFPA-80

D. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100

D. Zinc alloy-iron galvannealed ASTM A653.

E. Hot Dipped Galvanizing ASTM A525-A60

F. Anchors and Accessories Galvanized ASTM A591 and A568.

G. Smoke Control Assembly NFPA 105 or UL1784.

1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Handle and store hollow metal work in a manner to prevent damage, rusting, or twisting out of shape. Frames shall be spread and strapped. Doors shall be wrapped and stacked with 1/4" spaces to promote air circulation.

B. Store in an upright with heads up, dry position with blocking between units. Store on wood pallet a minimum of 4" above ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRESSED STEEL DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES

A. Frames fabricated of cold rolled steel ASTM A1008 Commercial Steel Type B.

1. Interior frames 16 gauge (0.053”).2. Exterior frames 14 gauge (0.067”) with zinc alloy-iron coating (galvannealed).

B. Provide base anchor, and anchor clips. Anchor clips 24" apart and detailed as shown on drawings and appropriate for wall type. Anchors for masonry shall be T-strap minimum 10 gauge (0.123) or equivalent in wire. Base anchor extended depth of underlayment where required.

1. Anchors and clips for exterior frames shall be galvannealed coated.

C. Frames shall be notched and mitered at corners, completely welded along joint and ground smooth. Joint at stop shall be filled.

D. Provide 3/16" steel reinforcement for full mortise hinges 1 1/4" x 10" long, and 1/8" steel reinforcement for closers, drop seals, and lock strike.

E. Provide 12 gauge (0.093”) steel guards welded to frames where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation in masonry and plaster walls.

F. Provide three (3) Glynn-Johnson GJ64 silencers on strike jambs of all non-labeled doors.



G. Mullions for window sections shall be solid tubes. Window assemblies shall be joined with inconspicuous splices.

H. Glazing stops shall be minimum 20 gauge (0.032”) steel with mitered corners. Secure with countersunk oval bead, self- tapping screws, not over 16" o.c. Openings shall be field glazed. Provide non-removable stops on inside of exterior doors and secure side of interior doors.

I. Frames in concrete walls shall have anchors with backer sleeves, frame drilled and dimpled, filled and ground smooth.

2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. Metal doors fabricated of cold rolled steel plates per ASTM A250-8 for Level Classification, with face plates wrapped around edges. Flush top edge and inverted channel bottom edge.

1. Doors 1¾” thick.2. Interior doors Level 2 (0.043”) reinforced with resin impregnated core (18 gauge).

B. Reinforce doors for Hardware.

1. Hinge reinforcement 7 gauge steel drilled and tapped, minimum 1-1/4” x 9”.2. Lock and exit device preparation 16 gauge (0.053”) drilled and tapped.3. Closers and holders 12 gauge (0.093”) drilled and tapped.

C. Trim kits for glazed openings, 18 gauge (0.043”).

D. Undercut doors 3/4" maximum. Where sills occur maximum is 3/8”. See drawings for additional undercut requirements.

E. Pairs of doors shall be sized to provide 3/16" between leaves when closed.

2.03 FINISH

A. Level all joints and grind smooth all welds before applying prime coat.

B. Apply shop coat of oven baked grey rust-inhibitive metal primer on doors and frames, including inside part of frames and accessory items. See Section 09 9100.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Back paint frames in field before installing. See Section 09 9100.

B. Where possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames set perfectly square and



plumb and anchors are securely attached.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install frames plumb, rigid, and in true alignment not exceeding 1/16” plus or minus from true line. Do not install frames which show rack, twist or out of square conditions. Install frames in masonry as wall is erected.

B. Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's templates and instructions.

C. Apply bituminous coating on backs of frames where filled with mortar or grout.

D. Construct and install labeled doors and frames to comply with current issue of NFPA Standard 80 and to rating as scheduled. Attach label at point of manufacture.

E. Pack insulation in backs of frames installed in stud partitions.

F. Remove rust and repair damaged areas. Touch up prime finish.

END OF SECTION


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 2110-1

SECTION 08 2110 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Wood doors; flush non-rated.

B. Factory glazing.

C. Door Description

1. Flush Interior Doors (Non-rated): 1-3/4" thick; solid core construction.

D. Factory Finish.

E. Related Sections

1. Metal Door Frames - Section 08 11002. Door Hardware - Section 08 7100

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

B. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards.

C. NFPA 80 - National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 80 Fire Doors and Windows.

D. NFPA 252 - National Fire Protection Association Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.

E. UL 10B - Underwriters Laboratories Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings to illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special blocking for hardware, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers.



B. Product data to indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; factory machining criteria and fire rating data.

C. Submit two corner samples of door construction approximately 10” square.

D. Submit instructions regarding care of door during shipping, unloading, storage, preparation for hanging and hanging.

E. Samples of finish for factory finished doors illustrating wood grain, stain, color and sheen. Sample of selected finish shall be resubmitted on 12" x 12" veneer for final approval or review.


A. Fire-rated door construction shall conform to ASTM E152, NFPA 80 and UL 10B.

B. Manufacturer shall have been in the production of commercial quality doors for a minimum of ten (10) years.

C. Source Limitation for Certified Wood: Obtain in flush wood door products to meet FSC STD 01-001.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to job site per manufacturer's instructions. Store doors laid flat.

B. Accept doors at job site in manufacturer's standard packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Do not store in damp or wet areas. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week.

D. Break seal at job site to permit ventilation.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame, door hardware installation, and field finishing.

B. Obtain approved metal frame shop drawings from the General Contractor.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide Manufacturer's Warranty including replacement, refinishing and rehanging, to the following term:

1. Interior Solid Core Doors: "Life of Original Installation"



B. Include special warranty coverage for delamination of veneer and warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE STANDARDS

A. AWI Quality Standards, Section 1300; core and facing qualities as specified herein.

B. Supply all doors from same manufacturer.

2.02. MANUFACTURERS:

A. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.B. Eggers IndustriesC. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.D. VT Industries, Inc.

2.03 DOOR CORE CONSTRUCTION

A. Core (Solid, Non-Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type Particleboard PC-5.

B. Stiles and Rails: Hardwood. Minimum 1-3/8". Top rail 5” blocking at doors with closers.

C. Binder for particleboard core shall not contain Urea-formaledehyde resin.

2.04 DOOR FACING

A. Veneer (Flush Interior Doors): AWI Type 1, Premium quality, 1/32" to 1/41" thick mechanically spliced Red Oak, plain sliced with book matched grain, for transparent finish.

B. Exposed Vertical Edges: Of same species as face veneer.

C. Crossbanding: 1/16" minimum hardwood.

D. Match door veneers in pairs of doors.

2.05 ADHESIVES

A. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.

2.06 ACCESSORIES



A. Vision frames when required shall be wood, of same species as door facing, prepared for countersink style screws.

B. Glass in non-fire rated doors less than 3” wide need not be safety glazed.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate non-rated 5-ply doors in accordance with specified manufacturers' requirements.

B. Laminate door facing, cross banding, and assembled core in a hot press.

C. Meeting Edges for Double Doors: standard metal wrap around astragal.

D. Provide non-rated flush doors with stiles of wood species to match face veneer.

E. Bond stiles and rails to cores. Sand for uniform thickness.

F. Factory sand assembled door leaf.

G. Factory machine fire rated doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Machine by factory or approved licensed mechanic.

H. Factory cut light and louver openings. Install glass in vision panels.

I. Provide inner blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.

J. Factory finish in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Section 1500, catalyzed conversion varnish, stain and sheen as selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

B. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire-rated and non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard, NFPA 80 and to UL requirements.

B. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.



C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 1/2". Trim fire-rated door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire-rating requirements.

D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates provided.

E. Machine cut for hinges and closers. Core for handsets and cylinders.



F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 1100 and hardware specified in Section 08 7100.

G. Damaged surfaces, split veneer edges, and ragged saw cuts will not be acceptable.

H. Install door louvers, plumb and level.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/4" measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to corner, over a maximum 42" x 84" surface area.

B. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/4" measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over a maximum 42" x 84" surface area.

C. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/4" measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over a maximum 42" x 84" surface area.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION

MIAMI UNIVERSITYMACMILLAN HALL RENOVATIONS 2019 PROJECT NO. 018-01130-00

ALUMINUM PROJECTED WINDOWS 08 5113-1

SECTION 08 5113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all thermal broken fixed and project in windows as shown on the drawings.

B. Related Sections

1. Sealants - Section 07 92002. Glass and Glazing - Section 08 8000

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide shop drawings showing size and arrangement of each window opening. Show details of sill, jamb, head and mullions.

B. Provide color samples.

C. Provide test results showing compliance with quality assurance and structural calculations.

D. Sample of Warranties.


A. Air Infiltration Test

1. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E283 with air pressure of 6.24 PSF shall not exceed 0.10 cfm/fcp. Air filtration of crack perimeter shall not exceed 0.15 cubic feet per minute per linear foot of crack.



B. Water Infiltration Test

1. With window sash and ventilator closed and locked there shall be no water leakage when tested per ASTM E331 at static pressure of 6.24 PSF.

C. Uniform Load Deflection Test

1. With window sash and ventilator closed and locked no member shall deflect more than 1/175 of it's span at from both sides of unit, first one side then the other, a static pressure of 60 PSF.


A. Materials shall be packed, loaded, shipped, unloaded, stored and protected in a manner which will avoid abuse, damage and defacement.

B. Remove all wet wrappings and store windows in a dry secure area, free of duct and fumes. Stack in a manner that prevents water to lay on frames.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall warrant product to be free of deficiencies in material and workmanship for a period of two years from acceptance by Owner and comply with all water, air, structural requirements including, hardware, anchorage, glazing, sealants, and setting method. Weather-stripping shall be guaranteed for a period of five (5) years Written warranty required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fixed Windows shall be one of the following products:

1. G241 Fixed Thermal Windows Peerless2. GT2200 Series (fixed) Graham (Basis of Design)3. Thermal 660 (fixed) EFCO

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000 psi ultimate tensile strength, a yield of 16,000 psi. Comply with ASTM B 221.



B. Fasteners: Aluminum, stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window units.

1. Do not use exposed fasteners on exterior except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal.

2. Provide non-magnetic stainless steel, tamper-proof screws for exposed fasteners, where required, or special tamper-proof fasteners.

3. Locate fasteners so as not to disturb the thermal barrier construction of windows.

C. Anchors, Clips And Window Accessories: Depending on strength and corrosion-inhibiting requirements, fabricate units of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A 123.

D. Glazing materials shall be of material compatible with aluminum and those sealants and sealing materials used in composite structure which have direct contact with the gasket. Standard exterior glazing gasket shall be a dry glazed closed cell elastomer in accordance with ASTM C509. Interior glazing shall be with aluminum glazing beads of the snap-in type and compression wedge of dense elastomer per ASTM C864.

E. All glass pockets, infixed windows, shall be weeped to provide positive drainage. Water shall be weeped to the exterior via frame weep slots protected by snap-in weep covers or integral drips.

F. Weatherstrip shall be a high quality material capable of meeting environmental exposure and performance requirements.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. All window framing members shall be approximately 4" in depth and of one part construction incorporating a 1/4" thermal barrier, consisting of a two-part, chemically curing, high density polyurethane. Frame and ventilator extrusions shall be .125" typical wall and .050" for glazing beads. Framed ventilator openings shall be double weatherstripped.

B. Window sills shall be fabricated of .125 aluminum with drip and up turned lip to fit behind window frame section. Sills anchored to blocking with aluminum clip.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. N/A



2.05 FINISH

A. All exposed surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes and shall receive a high performance organic finish; (2 coat Fluorpolymer): AA-C12C40R x chemical finish conversion coating consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and pluoropolymer color top coat containing not less than 7-% polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2.06 GLAZING

A. Windows shall be constructed to receive 1” insulated glass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Windows shall be installed, glazed and adjusted by experienced workmen in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weathertight installation at all joints and intersections and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.

3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. After installation all metal surfaces shall be cleaned to remove mortar, plaster, paint or other contaminants. After cleaning, all work shall be protected against damage until it is accepted.

3.03 GLASS AND GLAZING

A. Glass and glazing specified in Section 08 8000.

END OF SECTION


DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-1

SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment to install door hardware for the proper operation and fastening of all doors in the building, except as otherwise specified.

B. Hardware schedule is provided to allow bidder to estimate the cost and may not contain all the items required. Should item of hardware, not definitely specified, be needed for proper completion of the work, provide such items of type and quality suitable in the service required and comparable to adjacent hardware as stated herein.

C. Certain hardware items specified elsewhere in the specification are not included. Some items require only cylinders which shall be provided by this Contractor.

D. Related Sections

1. Astragals for Doors - Sections 08 1100, 08 21102. Automatic Door Operators - Section 08 71103. Electrical, Fire Alarm and Security Interface with Doors - Division 16

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit detailed hardware schedule. Include with schedule, two (2) sets of cuts or catalog sheets illustrating each type of hardware scheduled. Provide diagrams for electrical work showing all wiring to each component within a door assembly and description of operation.

B. Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems including wiring with respect to the location at the door openings.

C. Supply installation templates to appropriate door and frame suppliers. Submit copy of transmittal to Architect.

D. Submit parts of hardware to frame and door fabricators as appropriate and in a timely manner to avoid delay in construction.

E. Submit keying schedule developed after desired security intent is defined by Owner.




A. All hardware shall comply with the applicable requirements of the Ohio Building Code, Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, Americans with Disabilities Act, NFPA 80, 101 and Underwriters Laboratories.

B. Supplier shall be factory authorized direct distributor located within 50 miles of site.

C. A Preconstruction Meeting shall be held when electronic or complicated hardware is required. General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Hardware installer and Architect shall be present. Meeting shall be held prior to time when walls are enclosed so concealing of wiring can be planned to avoid the use of wire mold or exposed conduit.

D. Hardware in labeled fire or smoke rated openings shall bear identifying UL label or mark.


A. Furnish hardware properly unopened and in the boxes clearly marked for each door in accordance with door schedule.

B. Deliver keys as directed.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Except as noted otherwise all hardware shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion. Closers shall be warranted for a period of ten (10) years except electronic closers which shall be warranted for two (2) years. Exit devices warranted for three (3) years. Locksets five (5) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Hardware products specified and other acceptable manufacturers.

Hinges - McKinney Hager Roton, Stanley, Ives (IVE)Continuous Hinges - (IVE) Ives Hager Roton, PemcoLocksets - Schlage mortise locks Best, Sargent, Corwin RusswinKeyway Best Access N/A – Univ. Std.Exit Devices - (VON) Von Duprin 98/99 Sargent 8900 with electric strike

or 33/35 seriesCylinders - Corbin/Russwin Schlage, Best, SargentClosers –(HVY DTY) LCN 4040 series No equals permittedLow-Energy Operators Control Box LCN 7901 Series



Auto Flush Bolts (IVE) Ives Hager, RockwoodCoordinators (IVE) Ives Hager, RockwoodSilencers (IVE) Ives Hager, RockwoodKickplates (IVE) Ives Hager, RockwoodStops (IVE) Ives Hager, RockwoodOne way viewer (student rooms) (IVE) Ives, U698 Hager, RockwoodOverhead stops (GLY) Glynn-Johnson Rixson, Thresholds National Guard Products (NGP) Pemko, HagerSeals and Bottoms (PEM) Pemko Reese. ZeroAluminum Door Locks (ADA) Adams Rite No known equalThresholds - National Guard Reese, Zero

B. The Contractor shall base the bid on the use of hardware as specified. It is not the intent of the specification to exclude the use of products of equal quality and design, except as otherwise noted, which are standards of the Owner. Contractors wishing to bid products of other manufacturers shall submit catalog information and samples for approval in accordance with provisions stated in Instructions to Bidders.

C. Products coordinated, scheduled, purchased and delivered – but not installed – under this section include the following:

D. Cylinders for locks on aluminum and glass entrance doors.

E. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by the Contractor.

F. Provide all locks with construction cores.

G. Construction Keying:

H. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

I. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as directed by University.

J. Final Keying:

K. Contractor shall provide cylinders and pays for the combined cores.

L. Owner to provide keying sequences directly to Best. Best will ship completed cores directly to the University. The Owner will install the final cores.

2.02 STRIKES AND FASTENERS

A. Provide lock strikes appropriate to frame or adjoining door condition. Strikes to be 4 7/8" ANSI Type.

B. Provide wood screws, machine bolts, sex bolts, expansion anchors, etc. as appropriate for proper attachment. Use flat head Phillips head finished to match hardware where exposed.



C. Coordinate wiring for electric strike. Unless otherwise noted supply transformer to Electrical Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall do all wiring. Electric strike shall remain open for a programmed length of time to allow person to pass through door.



2.03 CLOSERS

A. Closers shall be sized by manufacturer in accordance with recommendation based on door function and weight and shall be adjustable down to below 5 lbs. and in conformance with ADA opening force. All labeled doors shall have closers whether listed or not. Provide parallel arm closers where required for appearance and on exterior doors. Doors shall

adjust to allow from a position of 70 opening to take at least three (3) seconds to move to a point 3" from the latch. Provide with standard cover and accessories for installation.

B. Closers thru-bolted to door with sex bolts.

2.04 KICKPLATES

A. Kickplates shall be 2" less than door width and mounted on push side of door unless otherwise noted.

2.05 DOOR STOPS

A. Door stops scheduled are suggested types. Actual wall or floor stops shall be determined by final application. Floor stops required where furniture, cabinetry, etc. prevents door from swinging against a wall. Floor stops, when required, to be Glynn Johnson FB13 or Ives FS436 with risers as necessary.

2.06 BUTTS

A. Butts shall be furnished with Phillips head screws. All exterior doors and other doors so noted shall have non-removable pins. Where sets are listed for doors over 7'-6" tall, change 1 1/2 pair to 2 pair for each leaf.

2.07 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit devices shall be of one manufacturer. Electrified devices and trim same series and design as mechanical devices. Exit devices labeled “UL” for life safety and for fire exit hardware as appropriate to use.

B. Lever design same as locksets unless otherwise noted. Use thru-bolts to secure devices and trim on wood doors.

C. Where removable mullions are required they shall be of same manufacturer of exit device.

2.08 KEYING

A. Key building to master keys and grand master as directed.



B. Provide two (2) change keys for each lock and six (6) master keys. Contractor shall provide key or keys for construction cores to Owner’s Security office for emergency entrance.

C. Locks shall be keyed to change key, submasters, building master and grand master as directed. All keys stamped “State of Ohio. Do Not Duplicate” on Type S bows.

2.09 KEY CONTROL CABINET

A. Provide one (1) wall mounted Lund key cabinet, complete with two (2) sets of red tags. Provide 10% expansion beyond capacity for building in cabinet. All keys in proper place in cabinet when presented to the Owner. Provide lock with three (3) keys keyed as directed. Provide receipt upon delivery. Copy of receipt to Architect.

B. For existing buildings match existing cylinder type unless otherwise directed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine frames and doors for compliance with installation tolerances.

B. Verify electrical work is roughed-in properly where applicable. Compare with wiring diagram submittals.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturers instructions and to templates when provided. Prefit or drill for hardware before finish is applied to doors and frames.

B. Install units level, plumb and true to line. Adjust and reinforce as required. All evidence of cutting shall be concealed in the finished work.

C. Set thresholds with machine screws and lead anchors. Set thresholds in sealant.

D. Set all fire rated devices in compliance with all labeling requirements.

3.03 INSPECTION

A. Provide the services of manufacturer’s representative to inspect hardware for proper installation, adjustment and operation. Representative shall prepare written report stating all locations and non-compliance and submit copy to General Contractor and Architect. Representative shall instruct Owner in adjustment, care and maintenance of hardware.

B. One-year Adjustment: Approximately one year after date of Final Acceptance, Installer



shall perform the following:

1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.

2. Consult with and instruct personnel on recommended maintenance procedures.3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty

design, materials, or installation of door hardware units.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect hardware from damage during remaining construction period.

PART 4 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Refer to hardware sets on drawings.

END OF SECTION


GLASS AND GLAZING 08 8000-1

SECTION 08 8000 - GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide glass and glazing as shown on drawings or herein specified.

B. Related Work

1. Wood Doors - Section 08 2110.2. Aluminum Doors and Store Front Framing - Section 08 41103. Aluminum Windows - Section 08 5113

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings

B. ASTM E152 Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

C. ASTM E163 Methods of Fire Tests of Window Assemblies

D. ASTM C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass

E. ASTA C1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass – HS, FT coated and uncoated.

F. CPSC 16CFR-1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing

1. Category I and II Minimum Classification per OBC Table 2406.1 based on under or over 9 S.F. of glass requiring safety glazing.

G. GANA Glass Association of North America

H. SIGMA Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples showing color selection for each type specified.



B. Show edge construction for insulating glass.

C. Samples of gaskets and glazing sealants together with glazing procedure information for each condition where used.

D. Samples of each type of glass. Each about 12” square.

E. Sample of warranty for each type of glass.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. All insulating glass (clear, reflective and spandrel) shall be warranted for a period of ten (10) years from date of acceptance, against obstruction of vision by dust or moisture or damage to reflective surface by peeling, cracking or other deterioration, caused by failure of hermetic seal, including glass breakage and leakage of water due to faulty manufacturer. Warrantee shall be limited to replacement of materials after the first year.

B. Laminated glass shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years from date of acceptance against defects such as delamination, edge separation, obstruction of vision and blemishes developed after acceptance. Warranty includes labor and material.


A. Each type of glass or glazing accessory shall be obtained from the same manufacturer for each installation method required.

B. Comply with all fire and safety requirements per code and as required by local authorities.

C. Comply with published recommendations of GANA and SIGMA.

D. Installation by experience installer.


A. The Contractor shall replace all broken or scratched and otherwise damaged glass, throughout the construction, without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Claims against other Contractors for breakage or damage due to operations under their contracts shall be entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. No recourse may be had to the Owner in such instances.

C. Handle all glass carefully to avoid damaging glass or causing excessive strain on the insulated glass seal. Follow manufacturer's instructions to avoid scratching or otherwise damaging glass. Provide non-staining separators when stacking glass.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GLASS

A. Manufacturers

1. Glass shall be Type 1, Class 1 q³ per ASTM C1036 for float glass and ASTM C1048 for heat strengthened glass.

a. Guardian Industries Corp.b. Pilkington Building Products North Americac. PPG Industries, Inc. d. Visteon

B. Insulating glass shall be hermetically sealed glazing units fabricated of two lites of glass separated by a 1/2" dry air space. Units shall be of the following. See drawing for location.

1. An inner and outer lite of 1/4" clear glass. 2. An inner and outer lite of 1/4" clear tempered glass. 3. An inner lite of 1/4” clear glass with Low E coating on #3 surface and outer lite of

1/4” clear glass.

C. Where a lite of tempered glass is required it shall be 1/4" complying with Consumer Products Safety Commission CPSC 16-CFR Part 1201 Category I or II per OBC Section 2406. Clear or tinted reflective as required.

D. Monolithic annealed glass shall be 1/4" clear float glass.

E. Butt glass 3/8" clear float glass, fully tempered.

F. Spandrel glass shall have an outer lite of 1/4" heat strengthened float glass and an inner lite of 1/4" heat strengthened float glass with ceramic coating on the #4 surface and separated by a hermetically sealed 1/2" thick dry air space.

G. Low E glass shall be low-emissity clear glass with a visible light transmittance of 60 to 65 percent for 1/4” thick glass.

H. In addition to the type of glass, thickness, and size, the architect shall indicate the required U- Value; shading Coefficient (SC); Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), visible light transmittance; solar energy transmittance; and relative heat gain of glazing unit.

I. Glazing for Interior Partitions shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch.

J. Clear, insulated glass units at windows as required to meet total unit U-value of .33 maximum at windows and .40 maximum at storefronts

K. Provide Low E coating (Sputtered on second surface) on exterior glazing, with argon



gas medium in glazing units.

L. Provide insulating glass at all window units.

M. Provide tempered glazing where required by building code.

2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDS AND GASKETS

A. Glazing Compounds

1. Provide black exposed glazing materials, unless another color is indicated, or unless another color is selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Provide hardness of materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the required application and condition of installation in each case. Provide only compounds which are proven to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted.

B. Silicone Rubber Glazing Sealant

1. At curtain wall and entrances - Silicone rubber, one-part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS TT-S-001543, Class A ASTM C-920 Type S Grade NS. Provide acid-type for non-porous channel surfaces and provide non-acid type porous channel surfaces (where any of the channel surfaces are porous).

C. Polyvinyl Chloride Glazing Gaskets

1. Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the profile and hardness shown, or as required for watertight construction; comply with ASTM D2287.

D. Vinyl Foam Glazing Tape

1. Closed cell, flexible, self-adhesive, non-extruding, polyvinyl chloride foam type; recommended by manufacturer for exterior, exposed watertight installation of glass, with only nominal pressure in the glazing channel; comply with ASTM D1667. Color black.

E. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials

1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.

2. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.

3. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25% deflection.

4. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect sash, frames, surrounds to be glazed. Notify the General Contractor of defects which would result in an improper installation of glass. Do not proceed until condition is corrected.

1. Location and number of weeps consistent with glazing procedures.2. Stops proper height and glazing space sufficient.

B. Do not begin installation of security film until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING

A. Clean the glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are used.

B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by Sealant Manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GLAZING

A. Perform glazing in strict accordance with “Glazing Manual” as published by the Flat Glass Marketing Association.

B. Each piece of exterior glass is required to be installed watertight and airtight. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact (for operating sash and doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the Work.

C. Glazing channels are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening based upon frame deflection and glass bite.

D. Comply with Manufacturer's instructions for heat strengthened and tempered glass.

E. Safety glass shall be carefully labeled per OBC requirements.

F. Protect edges of glass from damage when handling.



3.04 SETTING BLOCKS

A. Place setting blocks at the bottom quarter points. Length of each setting block shall be 0.1" for each square foot of glass area but no less than 4". Blocks should be 1/16" less than full width of sash glazing channel. Setting blocks shall not cover weep holes. Provide additional weep holes, if necessary, to make sure at least one (1) hole occurs in each side of setting blocks.

3.05 CLEANING

A. At the completion of the entire work, and just prior to final acceptance, all glass throughout the building shall be cleaned thoroughly, both inside and out. Final polish cleaning by General Contractor.

END OF SECTION


GYPSUM WALLBOARD (DRYWALL) 092500-1

SECTION 092500 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD (DRYWALL)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all metal studs, track, suspension systems, gypsum wallboard (drywall), beads, taping, joint treatment and all related work as shown on drawings and/or specified.

B. Frame around openings for fire extinguisher cabinets, electrical panels, ducts, heating units, etc. Provide additional blocking for support of shelves, cabinets, chalkboards, tackboards, toilet room partitions and accessories and other such items.

C. Provide specialty boards such as high abuse, exterior gypsum, moisture and mold resistant panels.

D. Provide gypsum board systems consisting of wallboard and framing for the following:

1. Interior gypsum wallboard partitions:2. Student Rooms: Impact resistant gypsum board for full height.3. Public Rooms: Impact resistant gypsum board for full height.4. Corridors: Impact resistant gypsum board to full height.5. Bathrooms: Cementitious tile backer board at wall tile and shower surround locations

and water resistant gypsum board painted with mildew resistant paint in other locations.

6. Apartments: Standard gypsum board on metal studs at new construction.7. Interior gypsum wallboard ceilings and soffits in common areas and student rooms.8. Alternate: where two layers of gypsum board are provided, Level 2 Abuse-resistant

gypsum board may be substituted for Impact-resistant gypsum board at the exposed layer. The concealed gypsum board may be standard gypsum board.

9. Standards:

(a) Comply with ANSI A97.1 “Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard.”

(b) Finished gypsum board assemblies shall comply with all applicable codes.

E. Related Sections

1. Insulation - Section 07 2100




A. Gypsum wallboard shall meet ASTM C-1396 for regular and Type X board.

B. Application and work shall be in accordance with ANSI A-97.1 "Specification for Application and Finishing Wallboard" and shall be of the very best quality.

C. Tolerances: Not more than 1/16" difference in true plane at joints between adjacent boards before finishing. After finishing, joints shall not be visible. Not more than 1/8" in 10' deviation from true plane, plumb, level and proper relation to adjacent surfaces in finished work.


A. Maintain a uniform room temperature at 55o F. to 70o F. in cold weather, during entire wallboard application, and joint treatment.

B. Building or space must be dry and watertight before wallboard is installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STANDARDS:

A. Ceilings shall be seismically braced per building code requirements.

B. Adhere to Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

C. Install control joints to isolate gypsum board surfaces as recommended by ASTM C840.

D. Provide levels of finish as specified in ASTM C840, “Recommended specification on levels of gypsum board finish”

1. Level 1: Base bid: areas above ceilings.2. Level 4: Base bid: all areas not receiving level 1 or 5.3. Level 5: Base bid: common areas with high visibility and exposure.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Cold rolled channels shall be 1 1/2" deep, weighing not less than 475 lbs. per 1,000 lf.

B. Stiffener channels shall be 16 gauge cold rolled channels weighing not less than 300 lbs per 1000 lf.

C. Screw furring channel 7/8” deep, .0179" base steel weighing not less than 287 lbs per 1000 lf and conforming to ASTM G645.

D. Hanger wire shall be 9 gauge for 1 1/2" channels. Wire for tying 1 1/2" channels to stiffener or screw channels shall be a double strand of 18 gauge wire. Wire ASTM A641



Class 1 zinc coated soft temper.



E. For anchoring into concrete structure use corrosion-resistant looped wire or metal with attachment holes capable of sustaining without failure a load equal to five times that of hanging materials when tested per ASTM E488. Cast-in-place or post installed chemical or expansion anchors.

2.03 SCREW STUD SYSTEM

A. Screw studs shall be 3 5/8", 25 gauge galvanized. Where unsupported length exceeds 13'-0" use 20 gauge galvanized studs and track. For high abuse board use minimum 20 gauge galvanized studs and track.

B. Screw stud track at base and head shall be 3 5/8" galvanized, 20 and 25 gauge.

C. Screws shall be Type S, 1" or pan head as required.

D. Studs shall extend from floor to bottom of structure above unless shown otherwise.

2.04 FURRING CHANNELS

A. Channels Z shape with 1" web formed of 25 gauge galvanized steel.

2.05 GYPSUM WALLBOARD (DRYWALL)

A. Gypsum wallboard shall be 5/8" thick; regular or fire rated Type X or Type C for rated assemblies as required. Long edges shall be tapered. Manufactured by: United States Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., Certainteed, G-P Gypsum Corp.

2.06 ABUSE-RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD

A. Panel properties: ASTM C36/C1396, manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels, minimum 5/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

B. Products: Provide one of the following:

1. Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Gypsum Board by National Gypsum Company2. Sheetrock VHI Firecode X Panels by United States Gypsum Company3. ToughRock Fireguard X by Georgia-Pacific

2.07 INTERIOR MOISTURE, MOLD AND ABUSE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD

A. Panel properties: Fire-resistance rated gypsum core, with additives to enhance mold/mildew resistance; minimum 5/8 inch thick; Mold and moisture resistance coated fiberglass mat for abrasion resistance; Long edges tapered and wrapped with coated fiberglass mat;



1. Mold Resistance: 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273.2. Water Absorption: less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 473.3. Permeance: greater than 10 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.4. Surface Abrasion Resistance: Classification Level 3 in accordance with ASTM C

1629.5. Indentation Resistance: Classification Level 1 in accordance with ASTM C 1629.6. Soft Body Impact Resistance: Classification Level 2 in accordance with ASTM C

1629.7. Hard Body Impact Resistance: Classification Level 1 in accordance with ASTM C

1629.

B. Products: Provide one of the following:

1. Gold Bond eXP Interior Extreme Gypsum Panel by National Gypsum Company2. Sheetrock glass-mat Mold Tough AR Firecode Core gypsum panels by USG3. DensArmor Plus Abuse-resistant Interior Panel by Georgia-Pacific

2.08 METAL BEADS

A. External corners shall be covered with 1" x 1 1/2" galvanized corner beads. Secure at a spacing of not more than 9" o.c. Apply casing beads as shown on drawings. Install casing beads at every place where gypsum wall abuts masonry walls or other materials.

2.09 Tape and Joint Compound

A. Tape and joint compound shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, for a smooth, flat joint cover.

2.10 ACOUSTIC SEALANT

A. Acoustic sealant shall be a non-hardening sealant, such as Tremco Acoustical Sealant or Pecora BA-98.

2.11 PRIMING COMPOUND

A. Priming compound latex equal to USG Sheetrock First Coat.

B. For surfaces requiring a Level 5 finish use USG Sheetrock Primer-Surfacer. Conduct on-job testing for best finished appearance and follow manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WALL FRAMING



A. Apply a minimum 1/2" serpentine bead of acoustical caulking on floor at base before placing track.



B. Align floor and ceiling tracks to assure plumb partition. Secure track with suitable fasteners or power studs, at a maximum of 24" o.c. Position studs in track on 16" centers by rotating into place for a friction fit. Secure studs located adjacent to door frames, partition intersections and corners by 3/8" pan head, Type "S" screws through both flanges of studs and tracks.

C. Examine and inspect studs and framing for rigidity, alignment and other defects. Make sure electrical work, framing around openings, insulation and other buried items are placed before installing board. Coordinate work with electrical, mechanical and other trades. Provide chases and furring as required.

D. Provide slip joint at head track at precast concrete structure.

E. Where required position resilient channels at right angles to studs on one side of partition and attach with pan head screws per manufacturers recommendations. Locate channels within 2" floor and 6" of ceiling. Cantilever no more than 6". Splice by overlapping at studs and reinforce with screws at both ends of splice.

3.02 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Coordinate location of lighting fixtures, diffusers and sprinkler system before installing suspension system.

B. Install 1 1/2" channels spaced not more than 48" apart and hung from structure using #9 wire spaced not more than 48" apart. Perpendicular to the 1 1/2" channels, install 3/4" channels or furring channels spaced not more than 24" o.c. and secured to the 1 1/2" channels with double strand #18 wire.

C. Install gypsum wallboard with long dimension at right angles to the 3/4" or furring channels.

D. Secure system to concrete with drilled or cast-in inserts. Power driven inserts not acceptable.

3.03 BOARD APPLICATION

A. Board shall be cut by scoring and breaking or by sawing, working from the face side. Scribe boards neatly.

B. Apply gypsum wallboard to studs with long dimension of board parallel to the studs. Center board ends over studs. Extend board above ceiling line to bottom of structure above.

C. Gypsum wallboard shall be applied first to ceiling at right angles to framing members, then to walls. Boards of maximum practical length shall be used so that an absolute minimum number of end joints occur. Board edges shall be brought into contact with each other but shall not be forced into place.



D. Wallboard joints at openings shall be located so that no end joint will align with edges of opening, such as doors and windows, unless control joints are shown to be installed at these points. End joints shall be staggered and joints on opposite sides of a partition shall not occur on the same stud.

E. Gypsum wallboard shall be held in firm contact with the framing member while fasteners are being driven. Fastening shall proceed from center portion of the wallboard toward the edges and ends. Fasteners shall be set with heads slightly below the surface of the wallboard in a dimple formed by a hammer or power screwdriver. Care shall be taken to avoid breaking the face paper of the wallboard. Improperly driven nails or screws shall be removed.

F. Secure to ceiling suspension system with 1" self-drilling screws 12" o.c. in the field of the board and on edges. Edge fasteners located not less than 3/8" or more than 1/2" from board edge.

G. Attach board to studs with type "S" screws at 12" o.c. in the field and 8" along edges. Complete entire wall on one side of partition before starting opposite side. Hold board about 1/8" to 1/2" above floor. Stagger boards horizontally and vertically so that joints do not line up. Fit board within space between joints in a neat, skilled manner.

H. Provide blocking and framing around openings as required. Surround opening with Type X board for rated wall systems.

I. Install double metal studs at door openings and borrowed lite or window frames. Install cold rolled channel horizontal stiffener over each door and at mid-point between floor and ceiling in all partitions.

J. Install friction fit sound insulation batts between studs for full height of studs. Secure where necessary to maintain in place.

K. Where resilient channels are installed as part of the wall system apply a bead of acoustic sealant at the floor between board and floor and at top where boards meet structural concrete on both sides of partition.

3.04 METAL BEADS

A. Where gypsum wall board meets a masonry wall or other dissimilar material install galvanized wallboard casing bead or "J" trim. Install by slipping over edge of board and face nail or screw the studs. Finish exposed surface with two coats of joint compound. Space between bead and masonry or other dissimilar material shall be caulked.

B. Metal corner beads shall be used at exterior corners. Beads shall be galvanized 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" secured to studs with nails or screws 9" o.c. Finish exposed faces with three coats of finishing compound.

C. Control joints shall be made of roll formed zinc with a tape protected 1/2" opening 7/16" deep. Coat edges with finish compound.



3.05 TAPING

A. Apply joint compound and tape as per manufacturer's instruction and to a smooth invisible joint.



B. Joint compound and topping compound shall be mixed according to printed instructions contained on the package.

C. A uniformly thin layer of joint compound shall be applied over the joint, approximately 4" wide. The tape shall be centered over the joint and embedded into the compound, leaving sufficient joint compound under the tape to provide proper bond. Ceiling and wall angles and inside corner angles shall be reinforced with the tape, folded to conform to the angle and embedded into the compound.

D. After compound is thoroughly dry or hard (approximately 24 hrs. for regular compound) the tape shall be covered with a coat of joint compound, spread over the tape approximately 3" on each side of the tape, and feathered out at the edge. After thoroughly dry, another coat of joint compound or topping compound shall be applied with a slight, uniform crown over the joint. This coat shall be smooth and the edges feathered approximately 3" beyond the preceding coat.

E. All inside corners shall be coated with, at least, one (1) coat of joint compound or topping compound with the edges feathered out.

F. All nail or screw head dimples shall receive three (3) coats. This may be applied as each coat is applied to the joints.

G. Flanges of wallboard corner beads control joints and beads shall be concealed by, at least, two (2) coats of compound. The first coat shall be joint compound, and the second coat may be joint compound or topping compound, feathered out approximately 9" on both sides of the exposed metal nose.

H. For joint and corner treatment fill joint and bed tape simultaneously.

I. Allow each application of compound to joints and fastener heads to dry, or harden, then wet sand if necessary. Caution shall be used to avoid roughing of the wallboard paper. All wallboard and treated areas shall be smooth and ready for decoration.

3.06 SOFFITS

A. Provide dropped soffits around beams, ducts, pipes, etc. as required to conceal such items. Provide dropped soffits over cabinets and other such soffit features as shown on drawings. Form structure of metal studs or similar light gauge metal sufficient to secure gypsum board. Space framing 16" o.c. or less. Provide appropriate corner beads and casing beads as required. Where adjacent wall is provided with sound restraining insulation provide insulation in soffit also to maintain sound barrier.

3.07 PANEL INSTALLATION

A. The Cement board panels shall be installed with rough side towards the room and with ends over supports. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Stagger end joints in successive courses.



B. The Cement board panels shall be fastened to the framing with 1 1/4" steel treated fasteners. Drive fasteners in field of panel first, working towards end and edges. Hold panel in firm contact with framing while driving fasteners. Space fasteners maximum 8" o.c. along framing with perimeter fasteners at least 3/8" and less than 5/8" from ends and edges. Drive fasteners so bottom of heads are flush with surface of panel to provide firm panel contact with framing. Do not drive fastener heads below panel surface.

3.08 LAMINATED APPLICATION

A. Verify that masonry wall is straight, joints tooled nearly flush, cleaned of excess mortar or surface projections. Apply gypsum board manufacturers recommended adhesive and apply as directed. Hold board 1/4" above floor line and support with shims until board is secure. Apply support to hold board to wall until set. Make sure the entire board adheres to masonry wall.

B. Install metal beads and corner beads securing to wall with concrete nails 24" o.c.

C. When board is secure apply tape and joint compound the same as applied to studs.

END OF SECTION


TILE 093000-1

SECTION 093000 - TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide tile complete, as indicated on drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with applicable sections of ANSI A108, A118, A136, and A137 for tile installation and tile setting materials.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C136 – Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.2. C144 – Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.3. C150 – Portland Cement.4. C627 – Robinson Floor Test for Tile Service Level.5. V1028 – Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by

the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

C. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation by Tile Council of America, latest edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated.

B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).

C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.


TILE 093000-2


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Waterproofing.2. Joint sealants.3. Cementitious backer units.4. Metal edge strips.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Discussion tile installation and related work.

1.8 COORIDNATION:

A. Required coordination with paint installer for paint over existing tile. See Section 2.7, I for required prep.


TILE 093000-3


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Furnish extra in an amount equal to 3% of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products of the following tile manufacturers will be acceptable, providing their products equal or exceed the quality of the specified products (see finish schedule) and the color match the colors specified, and Section 2.3, as verified by the Architect.

1. Porcelain Wall Tile (WCT-1)

a. Basis of Design: Florim USA (See Finish Legend for style, size and color)

2. Porcelain Tile (PT-1)


TILE 093000-4

a. Basis of Design: Daltile ( See Finish Legend for style size and color)

B. Tile setting and grouting materials:

1. Laticrete International, Inc.2. American Olean.3. Dal-Tile International.4. Mapei Corporation.5. TEC Incorporated.6. Custom Building Products.

C. Colors and Patterns: As reflected on the finish schedule, approved manufacturers must match pattern, color. List below and Section 2.3.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide Architect/Engineer’s selections from manufacturer’s full range of colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated (as reflected or finish schedule).

2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type


TILE 093000-5

of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Porcelain Wall Tile: (WCT-1)

1. Color and Pattern: As reflected on finish schedule. Approved manufacturers must match color, pattern, and below list.

2. Composition: Porcelain3. Water absorption ASTM-C373: <0.5%4. Breaking Strength ASTM-C648: >4005. Scratch Hardness MOHS: >7

B. Porcelain Tile (PT-1):1. Color and Pattern: As reflected on finish schedule. Approved manufacturers

must match color, pattern, and list below.2. Composition: Color Body Porcelain.3. Surface: Unpolished.4. Nominal Size: 12” x 24 Floor Tile”.5. Thickness: 3/8”.6. Water absorption ASTM C373: <0.57. Breaking Strength ASTM C648: > 275 lbs.8. DCOF: >0.429. Scratch Hardness MOHS: 8.0

2.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANES FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the following.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), and fabric reinforcement. Crack Isolation: 40mil (min.), self-adhering, fabric-reinforced, anti-fracture membrane.

1. Products:

a. Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane meet specification above.

b. LATICRETE International Inc.; meet specification above.c. MAPEI Corporation; meet specification above.


TILE 093000-6

2.5 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.

2. Epoxy Mortar/Grout: At toilet rooms and wet locations; Non-shrinking, non-sagging, stain-, chemical-, and high temperature resistant, water-cleanable, 100%-solids, high-strength. Color as selected on Finish Schedule. Use silicone sealant in lieu of water for grout mix and as a surface sealant.

2.6 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

B. Products:

1. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.2. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.3. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.4. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic, designed specifically for flooring applications, stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C. Provide Schluter Systems metal trims:

1. Provide Schluter Systems Jolly edge at all exposed unfinished edges of tile. 2. Provide Schluter Systems Reno-U transitions at toilet room entrances.

D. Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.


TILE 093000-7

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

F. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Products:

a. Bonsal, W. R., Company; Grout Sealer.b. Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer.c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Grout and Tile Grout Sealer.e. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile

Grout 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile.f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.g. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone TA-257 Silicone

Grout Sealer.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.


TILE 093000-8

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.

1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.


TILE 093000-9

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants."

G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:

1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.

H. Cementitious Backer Boards: At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.

3.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Wall Tile Installation: For interior wall installations, comply with the following:

1. Installation Method:


TILE 093000-10

a. Install wall tile in accordance with ANSI A108.5, other referenced ANSI and TCA specifications, and TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation”, except for more stringent requirements of manufacturer or these specifications.

b. Cut and fit tile tight to protrusions and vertical interruptions and treat with a compatible sealant as specified in Section 07900. Form corners and bases neatly.

c. Work tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joint watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or grout.

d. Prepare surface, fit, set, bond, grout, and clean in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI standards and Tile Council of America.

2. Setting Bed and Grout: Comply with ANSI requirements grout.

3.6 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. Refer to Installation Schedule at the end of this section TCA setting method.

1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.

3.7 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR INSTALLATION

A. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation: For interior floor installations, comply with the following:

1. Tile Type: porcelain floor tile. 2. Installation Method:

a. Install tile materials in accordance with ANSI A137.1, other referenced ANSI and TCA specifications, and TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation”, except for more stringent requirements of manufacturer or these specifications.

b. Cut and fit tile tight to protrusions and vertical interruptions and treat with a compatible sealant as specified in Section 07900. Form corners and bases neatly.

c. Work tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joint watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or grout.

d. Prepare surface, fit, set, bond, grout and clean in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI standards and Tile Council of America.

3. Setting Bed and Grout: Comply with ANSI requirements grout.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:


TILE 093000-11

1. Porcelain Tile: See manufacturer’s recommendations.2. Ceramic Wall Tile: See manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations where exposed edge of tile flooring meets other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

D. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:

1. Tile floors and wall tiles in wet areas.2. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 x 8 inches (203 x 203 mm) or larger.3. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove epoxy and latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.



TILE 093000-12



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension-system members.2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.

5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the

following:

a. Lighting fixtures.



b. Diffusers.c. Grilles.d. Speakers.e. Sprinklers.f. Access panels.g. Perimeter moldings.

7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to acoustical panels.

8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot (1:96).

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed a qualified testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to

2 percent of quantity installed.3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.4. Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Extra Materials: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2% of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard 15- year warranty on Acoustical Panel Ceilings and suspension system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A or with Fire Guard according to ASTM E 1264.2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (APC-1)

A. Product: USG Corp.; Frost ClimaPlus #484.



B. Acoustic Materials: Mineral fiber lay-in type acoustic ceilings shall be specified. Panels shall be a minimum of 5/8 inch thick and maximum panel size shall be 2 feet x 2 feet.

C. Suspension System: Fabricated from hot dipped galvanized steel with white baked enamel finished Aluminum Cap, complying with ASTM C635.

D. Supports in Moisture Locations: Stainless steel hanger wires must be specified for canopy suspension systems and for other systems in locations subject to moisture penetration or condensation.

E. Alternate acoustic ceiling products or sizes may be used in limited areas as pre-approved by the University to achieve special design intent or meet specific criteria.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer: USG Corp 15/16” Grid system.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.

C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.3. Face Design: Flat, flush.4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.5. Cap Finish: Painted white

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Cast-in-place anchors.b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated according to

ASTM B 633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition.



c. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316.

d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.4. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Manufacturer: USG Corporation.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.



C. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements.

1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.2. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils

(0.04 mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9200 Caulking and Sealants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.



B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing’s that interfere with location of hangers at spacing’s required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member

supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.



E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.

3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.

5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

6. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative.

B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 1

SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide all resilient flooring, resilient base and accessories as shown on drawings or specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E-84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics.

B. ASTM E-648 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems, and ASTM E-662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density f 450 or less.

C. ASTM F-1869 Standard Test Method of Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples (labeled with codes listed on Finish Schedule) for verification for each type (minimal 6” x 6”) and accessories.

B. Submit product data for each type adhesive and floor leveling material.

C. Submit maintenance data for finishes to be included in the maintenance manuals.

D. Sustainable Design Submittals: See section 01 3520 LEED REQUIREMENTS for - LEED for Schools 2009 for sustainable requirements.


A. Maintain temperature, in space to receive resilient materials, between 70o and 90o for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55o in the space.

B. Condition materials and adhesives in similar room temperatures for at least 48 hours prior to installation. Protect from direct flow of heat from hot air registers or similar heat producing devices.





1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, & pattern of floor tile installed.

2. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide a minimal 5-year warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RESILIENT BASE

A. Standard cove style base shall be rubber 1/8" thick, 4" high, uniform thickness, and in as long lengths as practicable, to suit conditions. Base shall conform to ASTM E648 - Class I and ASTM E662 - 450 or less.

1. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

a. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

b. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered).c. Style: Cove (base with toe).

2. Outside and inside corners at gypsum board walls to be pre-formed and inside corners: Job formed or preformed.

3. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

4. Color and Pattern to match finish schedule.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Johnsonite Tarkett b. Roppe Corporationc. Burke Mercer Flooring Productsd. R.C. Musson Rubber Company

E. Installation per manufacturer’s written instructions with warrantied adhesives and finishing products.



2.05 RESILIENT TILE

A. Manufacturer: Basis of Design PatCraft, other manufacturers must match below and submit samples prior to bid.

1. Color and Style: (see finish schedule)2. Construction: Homogeneous Tile3. Overall Thickness: 1/8 inch.4. Size: 12” x 12”5. Installation: Glue Down6. Recommended Adhesive: Shaw 41007. Reference Specification: ASTM F1700 Class I monolithic solid vinyl tile Type A

(smooth).8. Product to be installed with heat welded accents: (See Finish Schedule for Color

and Style of Weld rods)9. Performance Testing: as follows:

a. Static Load/ ASTM F970: Modified 2500 psib. Residual Indentation/ ASTM F 1914: Passesc. Resistance to Chemicals/ ASTM 925: Passesd. Radiant Flux / ASTM E 648: Class Ie. Smoke Density/ ASTM E 662: <450

2.06 ADHESIVE

A. Adhesive shall be premium grade waterproof latex adhesive and shall be used without adulteration, and in accordance with manufacturer's direction.

B. Adhesive for concrete slabs below grade shall be environmentally friendly two part epoxy especially formulated. When applying force adhesive into seams to create a chemical bond clean up excess immediately.

C. Verify that all adhesives to be used are compatible and effective when used with concrete curing materials or methods.

2.07 TRANSITION EDGE STRIPS

A. Edge strip, where resilient tile or carpet meets concrete floor. Provide edges for smooth wheeled traffic transition.

B. Material: Vinyl.

1. Reducing Edge Strips: Provide at exposed edges of applied floor covering, no less than 1 inch (25 mm) wide with beveled forward edge, of same thickness as floor covering material.

2. Reducing Transition Strips: Provide where applied flooring abuts other applied flooring approximately 2 inches (51 mm) wide, with edge thickness matched to respective floor thickness.



C. Color and Pattern to match finish schedule.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Johnsonite Division2. Roppe Corporation3. Burke Mercer Flooring Company4. R.C. Musson Rubber Company

E. Installation per manufacturer’s written instructions with warrantied adhesives and finishing products.

2.08 UNDERLAYMENT

A. Provide underlayment as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. Apply to fill cracks, voids, and depressions to give a level smooth surface, also to provide sloped transitions where level of floor differs. For deep imperfection apply latex in layers. Allow latex to dry thoroughly before applying resilient materials. Quick set calcium sulfate or similar plaster based products not permitted.

B. Provide underlayment where resilient tile is meeting carpet or other surfaces for a smooth level transition between materials. No transition edge strip will be allowed at carpet edges unless to concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Patch depressions and other imperfections with latex underlayment for a smooth level surface. Also apply latex underlayment where level of adjoining floors differ. Apply to a long sloped transition. Where leveling requires latex to be thicker than 1/8" apply in several coats allowing preceding coat to set before applying further coats.

B. Floors shall be dry, smooth, free of dust, solvents, wax, paint, grease, oil, coatings, asphaltic adhesives and other such foreign materials detrimental to proper adhesion. Remove by wet grinding or a solution of trisodium phosphate per flooring manufacturer's recommendation.

1. Concrete floors shall be allowed to dry as long as possible before installing resilient flooring but no less than 30 days after enclosing building.

2. Concrete floors shall be tested for moisture emission rate per ASTM F1869 Calcium Chloride Test. Conduct tests in areas most subject to dampness. Provide three tests in the first 1,000 sf plus one additional test for each additional 1,000 sf Moisture when tested shall not exceed 3 pounds per 24 hours for sheet goods and 5 pounds per 24 hours for tile. In addition floors shall be tested for alkalinity. Allowable PH of 5 to 9.

3. Where the dryness of floors is further questionable install a 9 sf sample of flooring with proposed adhesive. Check for moisture and bond after 72 hours.



4. All test locations, methods and results shall be reported in writing to the General Contractor and Architect. Where manufacturers test procedures differ from methods stated, these shall be submitted in writing prior to execution and results likewise reported.

C. Flooring shall be installed over the entire area, from wall to wall, and not omitted under equipment, counters, casework etc.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Resilient materials shall be applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.

B. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer’s solid-strand product for heat welding accent seams.

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections noted into seamless flooring. Prepare, weld and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.

C. Tile shall be laid per the manufacturer’s written instructions and recommended direction.

D. Fit flooring material neatly and tightly into breaks and recesses, against walls to within 1/64". Fit around pipes and penetrations with a minimum of cuts.

E. The completed floor, when protection is necessary, shall be covered with a heavy building paper. Protect floor from rolling loads for 48 hours after installation

F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.

G. Install rubber accessories secured to substrate to not cause trip hazards, per manufacturers written instructions.

H. Contractor shall install resilient base in toe space of all built-in cabinets unless otherwise noted. Base shall be installed on walls under counters where cabinets can be removed for accessibility access.

3.03 CLEANING AND FINISH

A. Prior to placing resilient materials the Contractor shall meet with the Owner to discuss finishing materials and procedures for clean up, sealer and finishing. This to describe conditions floor will be in when Owner takes possession and to provide maintenance procedures.

B. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed for initial clean up after installation of resilient flooring materials. Finish materials shall be as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise directed by the Owner. Sweep or vacuum floor. Damp mop with neutral detergent and remove excess adhesive and marks. Apply finishing per manufacturer’s written instructions a top quality commercial floor polish. This will protect floor until construction is complete.



C. Apply finishing surface treatment per manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. When construction is complete and when directed top scrub the floor and apply two coats of approved finish.

END OF SECTION


CARPET 096810-1

SECTION 096810 - CARPET

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide carpet and installation as specified, as indicated on drawings, and as required for proper completion of the Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance, stain resistance, waterproof backing system, antimicrobial system, and installation methods.

B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet: 12-inch- square or tile sample.2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long

Samples.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


CARPET 096810-2


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Lifetime Warranty against delamination and edge ravel

C. Lifetime Warranty moisture barrier backing in accordance to the British Spill Test.

D. Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

E. Treatment Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s written warranty, including material and labor, warranting that an anti-microbial treatment has been incorporated into the carpet backing to effectively prevent growth of mold, mildew, bacteria, and odor-causing micro-organisms.

1. Warranty Period: Lifetime of product.

F. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace carpeting which fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period is three years after date of substantial completion.


CARPET 096810-3

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet: equal to 5 percent of amount installed (provide full cartons).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT-1)

A. Manufacturer: Basis of Design Interface other manufacturers must match below and submit samples prior to bids.

1. Color and Pattern: (see finish schedule)2. Fiber: Post Consumer Content Type 6,6 Nylon3. Yarn Weight: 14oz/yd24. Face Construction: tufted texture loop 5. Pile Height: not less than 0.13 inch.6. Backing: recycled backing GlasBac RE or GlasBac. Vinyl or rubber, waterproof

backing system, with anti-microbial treatment incorporated into the carpet backing to effectively prevent growth of mold, mildew, bacteria, and odor-causing micro-organisms. Provide treatment warranty as specified in Part 1 of this Section

7. Radiant Panel: ASTME 648 Passes8. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

a. Flammability – ASTM D2859: Passing Methenamine Pill Testb. Critical Radiant Flux – ASTM E684: Not less than 0.45 watts per square

centimeter.c. Smoke Density – ASTM E84: 450 or less

9. Physical Properties: As follows:

a. Tuft Bind – ASTM D1335: Rating, minimum 20 lb.b. Delamination Stretch – FTMS 191-5100: Rating, minimum 2.5 lb. per inch;

withstand wheel load of 1,500 lbs.c. Abrasion Resistance – ASTM D1175: Rating, withstand 6,000 cycles

minimum without showing excessive wear. d. Face Weight – ASTM D5858: Minimum 14 oz./sq. yd.e. Pile Density – ASTM D6859: Minimum 7,500 oz./sq. yd.

B. Accessories:

1. Carpet Edge Guard: Non-metallic type. Extruded or molded vinyl or rubber of size and profile indicated; minimum 2 inch wide anchorage flange. Color from manufacturer’s full range.


CARPET 096810-4

2. Adhesive: Permanent type, low VOC, water resistant and non-staining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements of installed carpet.

3. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturer of carpet and other carpeting accessory products; selected by installer to meet project circumstances and requirements.

4. Leveling Material: Cementitious type, similar to k-55 by ARDEX, INC.

C. Backing: Non-PVC Backing, low VOCs.

2.2 CARPET TILE (CPT-2)

A. Manufacturer: Basis of Design Tandus|Centiva other manufacturers must match below and submit samples prior to bids.

1. Color and Pattern: (see finish schedule)2. Fiber: Dynex SD® Nylon / Dynex® Nylon3. Yarn Weight: 24 oz/sq yd | 813.6 g/sq m4. Size: 18” x 36”. 5. Face Construction: Stratatec® Patterned Loop6. Pile Height: .154 inch | 3.9 mm7. Backing: ER3® Modular RS8. Radiant Panel: Class 1 (mean average CRF: 0.45 w/sq cm or higher) (ASTM E-

648)9. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

a. Flammability – ASTM D2859: Passing Methenamine Pill Testb. Critical Radiant Flux – ASTM E684: Not less than 0.45 watts per square

centimeter.c. Smoke Density – ASTM E84: 450 or less

10. Physical Properties: As follows:

a. Tuft Bind – ASTM D1335: Rating, minimum 20 lb.b. Delamination Stretch – FTMS 191-5100: Rating, minimum 2.5 lb. per inch;

withstand wheel load of 1,500 lbs.c. Abrasion Resistance – ASTM D1175: Rating, withstand 6,000 cycles

minimum without showing excessive wear. d. Face Weight – ASTM D5858: Minimum 20 oz./sq. yd.e. Pile Density – ASTM D6859: Minimum 7,500 oz./sq. yd.

2.3 WALK-OFF CARPET TILE (CPT-3)

A. Manufacturer: Interface

1. Color and Pattern: (see finish schedule)2. Fiber: 100 percent recycled Type 6 Nylon3. Yarn Weight: 26 oz/ square yard.4. Size: 19.69” x 19.69”.


CARPET 096810-5

5. Face Construction: Tufted texture loop. 6. Pile Height: not less than 0.2 inch.7. Backing: recycled backing GlasBac RE or GlasBac. Vinyl or rubber, waterproof

backing system, with anti-microbial treatment incorporated into the carpet backing to effectively prevent growth of mold, mildew, bacteria, and odor-causing micro-organisms. Provide treatment warranty as specified in Part 1 of this Section

8. Radiant Panel: ASTME 648, Class 1; NBS Smoke ASTME662 less than 450.9. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

a. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.b. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646.c. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC-165.d. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units)

per AATCC-16.

10. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria; not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per AATCC-174.

a. VOC Limits: Provide carpet that complies with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116:

b. Total VOCs: 0.5 mg/sq. m x h.c. 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.d. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.e. Styrene: 0.4 mg/sq. m x h.x h.f. Styrene: 0.4 mg/sq. m x h.

2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.

1. Provide trowelable leveling and patching compounds where carpet tile is meeting where there is a change in material thickness; provide smooth change between all surfaces.

B. Adhesive: Manufacturer’s Tactiles glueless installation with full spread releasable adhesive at doorways. Adhesive to be low VOC, water resistant and non-staining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements of installed carpet.

C. Carpet Edge Guard: Non-metallic type. Extruded or molded vinyl or rubber of size and profile indicated; minimum 2 inch wide anchorage flange. Color from manufacturer’s full range.

D. Provide smooth wheeled transitions strips at transitions between carpet and abutting floor surfaces.


CARPET 096810-6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Installer must examine substrates for \moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless the manufacturer’s written instructions include more stringent requirements. In case of conflict, the more stringent requirement shall govern unless otherwise approved by the Architect.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Method: Tactile or equal no glue installations; according to manufacturer’s recommendations if approved by Owner.


CARPET 096810-7

B. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following:

1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."

C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. No seams in doorways or thresholds, traffic areas, or main aisle ways.

D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer.



CARPET 096810-8



PAINTING 09 9100-1

SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces, complete as indicated on drawings, as specified, and as required for proper completion of the Work.

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Architectural woodwork.b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.c. Light fixtures.d. Distribution cabinets.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:


PAINTING 09 9100-2

a. Foundation spaces.b. Furred areas.c. Ceiling plenums.d. Utility tunnels.e. Pipe spaces.f. Duct shafts.g. Elevator shafts.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:

a. Anodized aluminum.b. Stainless steel.c. Chromium plate.d. Copper and copper alloys.e. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

a. Valve and damper operators.b. Linkages.c. Sensing devices.d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

a. Due to this being renovation if painting occurs all designations and markings must be relabeled (at sides) once painting it completed.

b. Color Coding for Piping: Include finish painting of insulated and uninsulated piping. Include color banding of finished piping. Refer to Division 23 for details.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section “Misc. Cast-In-Place Concrete” for sealed concrete.2. Division 5 Section "Structural Metal Framing" for shop priming structural steel.3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.4. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and

frames.5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Wallboard" for surface preparation of gypsum board.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.


PAINTING 09 9100-3

3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.

B. Provide (1) Color sample of each color for verification.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of wall surface.2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.3. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work,

after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.

a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.

4. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.


PAINTING 09 9100-4

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.5. Thinning instructions.6. Application instructions.7. Color name and number.8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.


A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.


A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish and additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8L) of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products of the following paint manufacturers will be acceptable, providing their products equal or exceed the quality of the specified products and the color matches the colors specified as verified by the Architect. Refer to Finish Schedule for colors.


PAINTING 09 9100-5

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. Refer to Schedule at the end of this section for finish systems for various substrates.

C. Exterior Primers: (unless noted otherwise, no product substitutions shall be accepted)

1. At all exterior surfaces, new or previously painted, except metal and masonry, use one of the following:

a. PPG Porter Paints Seal Grip Primer 17-921b. PPG Porter Paints Acri-Shield #515 Acrylic Bonding Primerc. Benjamin Moore Fresh Start Acrylic Primerd. Town & Ranch Aqua-Bond Primer

2. At all metal windows, doors and frames, new or previously painted, use one of the following:

a. PPG Porter Paints Multi-Purpose Primer 7-282 b. PPG Porter Paints Pitt-Tech Primer 90-712c. Town & Ranch Rust-Nox Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Primerd. Town & Ranch Rustnox II Acrylic Direct to Metal Primere. Benjamin Moore Acrylic Metal Primer M04

3. At steel grates, handrails, railings, ladders and miscellaneous building-related steel, use the following:

a. PPG Porter Paints Amercoat 235 Primer

4. At all masonry, concrete or stucco exterior ceiling surfaces, new or previously painted, use one of the following:

a. PPG Porter Paints Acri-Shield Bonding Primer 515b. PPG Porter Paints Pigmented Bonding Primer 4-809c. Town & Ranch Lex-Bond #100 Acrylic Latex Primerd. Benjamin Moore Fresh Start Primer 023

D. Exterior Paint:

1. At all masonry, concrete or stucco exterior ceiling surfaces, new or previously painted, use one of the following:

a. PPG Porter Paints Acri-Shield Satin PP739b. Town & Ranch #690 Dura-Lex Satinc. Benjamin Moore Glo Latex 096

2. At exterior doors, trim and windows, wood or metal, and all previously painted wood surfaces, use one of the following:

a. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, color to be 20YY – Dakota Land, by ICI Paints. Coordinate color with university.


PAINTING 09 9100-6

b. Note: If any of these items are to be painted white, use: PPG Porter Paints Acri-Shield Exterior Satin 100% Acrylic

c. PPG Porter Paints Acri-Shield semi-gloss PP649d. Town & Ranch Trim Luxe. Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec House & Trim 170

3. At steel grates, handrails, railings, ladders, and miscellaneous building-related steel, use the following:

a. PPG Porter Paints Pitt Thane Urethane

E. Exterior Stain:

1. For siding, decks, doors, trim, and windows:

a. PPG Porter Paints Acri-Shield Solid Stain PP1975b. PPG Porter Paints Acri-Shield Semi Stain PP1952c. Town & Ranch PPG Rez Exterior 77-860 Seriesd. Benjamin Moore Moorwood Deck & Siding Stain C070

F. Exterior Varnish:

1. For trim, windows, doors, and windows:

a. PPG Porter Paints Olympic Gloss Varnish 41844b. PPG Porter Paints Olympic Satin Varnish 41846c. Town & Ranch Lextron Poly Varnish 901 Glossd. All Pro Acrylic Gloss Varnish AP30511e. All Pro Gloss Polyurethane AP30701

G. Exterior Sealer: (no product substitutions shall be accepted)

1. At limestone or sandstone window sills or window caps, use the following:

a. ProSoCo/Sure Klean H-40

H. Exterior Caulk:

1. For trim and window and door casings, caulk must meet or exceed the following description:

a. Acrylic Latex Flexible Exterior Caulk with Silicone, paintable, mildew resistant, 40 year or better durability guarantee; color: white.

b. PPG Porter Paints Top Gun 200 1414

I. Interior Primers: (no product substitutions shall be accepted)

1. At all surfaces, new or previously painted, except metal and masonry use:

a. PPG Porter Paints 17-921 Seal Grip

2. At all metal surfaces, new or previously painted, use:


PAINTING 09 9100-7

a. PPG Porter Paints Low VOC Multi-Purpose Primer 7-281 b. PPG Porter Paints Pitt-Tech Primer 90-712

3. At all masonry, concrete or stucco surfaces, new or previously painted, use:

a. PPG Porter Paints Pigmented Bonding Primer 4-809b. PPG Porter Paints Seal Grip 17-921c. PPG Porter Paints Acri-Shield Bonding Primer 515

J. Interior Paint: (no product substitutions shall be accepted)

1. For ceilings or ceiling tiles:

a. PPG Porter Paints SpeedHide Eggshell 6-411

2. For metal surfaces, walls, trim and windows:

a. PPG Porter Paints Pitt Tech Satin 90-474

3. For doors and frames:

a. PPG Porter Paints Pitt Tech Plus Semi-gloss 90-1210

K. Interior Stain: (no product substitutions shall be accepted)

1. For trim, windows, doors, and casegoods:

a. PPG Porter Paints Olympic LO-VOC Stain 44500

L. Interior Varnish: (no product substitutions shall be accepted)

1. For trim, windows, doors, and casegoods:

a. PPG Porter Paints Interior Waterborne Satin Varnish 42786A

M. Interior Caulk: For trim and window and door casings, caulk must meet or exceed the following description:

1. Acrylic Latex Flexible Caulk with Silicone, paintable, mildew resistant, 40 year or better durability guarantee; color: white.

2. PPG Porter Paints Top Gun 200 1414

N. Ceilings (dry fall primer): for areas where rust is present prime for steel. 1 coat required. Prep for Dry fall finish coat(s) and provide per manufacturer’s written requirement.

2.02 CONCRETE SEALER

A. After surface is abraded apply silicone acrylic concrete sealer, applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.


PAINTING 09 9100-8

1. PPG Industries Perma-Crete Seal Clear Concrete Sealer 4-6200XI.2. Benjamin Moore and Company, equal system to PPG.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

3. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Remove all chipping and loose paint.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement

plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.


PAINTING 09 9100-9

b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other

wet wall construction occurs on back side.e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat

of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.


PAINTING 09 9100-10

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with normally accepted industry standards to provide a substrate suitable for the long-term adhesion of specified coatings.

B. Application:

1. Apply paints only within the temp. ranges allowed by mfrs.2. Mix and prepare materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions.3. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat.4. All paints and coatings shall be applied by roller and brush. No spray-on painting

allowed.5. Apply a minimum of two finish coats of paint. 6. Specify paint coats no thinner than the manufacturers recommended spreading

rates.7. Apply the first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise

prepared as soon after preparation has been completed as possible.8. All new/existing work shall be properly primed prior to painting with a minimum of one

primer coat.9. Provide required sealants as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

10. Interior woodwork:

a. Natural finish: Stain, two coats sanding sealer, two coats semi-gloss varnish. If polyurethane varnish is used, delete sanding sealer. Wood doors shall also be sealed along bottom.

b. Painted finish: primer and two coats semi-gloss latex enamel.

11. Metal Doors and Frames: Shop coat, 1 primer coat and two coats of semi-gloss enamel.

12. Ceilings, Gypsum Wallboard or Plaster: Spackle as required, 1 primer coat and two coats eggshell latex.

13. Interior Concrete or Concrete Masonry Unit (without integral color): One coat self-sealing heavy filler-type primer and two coats semi-gloss latex.

14. Existing Painted Surfaces:

a. In accordance with paint manufacturer’s recommendations, all surfaces and absorbed contaminants (i.e., dirt, dust, grease, oil, mildew, moisture, chemical fall-out, etc.) shall be removed prior to applying any new coat of paint.


PAINTING 09 9100-11

b. Removal of old painting system prior to the application of a new coat of paint shall not be required unless adhesion problems between the existing coating and the new proposed coating cannot be eliminated.

1) New coating shall be compatible with existing coating based on previous testing of coating products for adhesion by manufacturer and installer’s field experience.

2) A test patch shall be used when previous testing does not exist or is unacceptable to the Architect.

3) The preparation of substrates does not apply to previously coated surfaces that contain lead. These surfaces require special preparation. Refer to the recommendations of the paint manufacturer for preparation requirements.

a) Any previously coated surfaces containing lead should be brought to the attention of the Architect immediately.

C. Provide extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied, for each type and color specified, to the University. Furnish one gallon of each material and color.

D. Job Mock-Ups: Mock-Ups will serve as standard for acceptance of work. Leave approved mock-ups in place as part of completed project. Provide the following mock-ups:

1. Concrete masonry, painted finish: 50 square feet2. Ornamental handrail: 6 lineal feet of each exposure3. Decorative grille: one grille4. Gypsum board, painted finish: Mock-up room walls complete

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.

F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Uninsulated metal piping.2. Uninsulated plastic piping.3. Pipe hangers and supports.4. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets.5. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable

jacket material.6. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Switchgear.2. Panelboards.3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.


PAINTING 09 9100-12

H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

J. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.


A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:

1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner:

a. Quantitative material analysis.b. Abrasion resistance.c. Apparent reflectivity.d. Flexibility.e. Washability.f. Absorption.g. Accelerated weathering.h. Dry opacity.i. Accelerated yellowness.j. Recoating.k. Skinning.l. Color retention.m. Alkali and mildew resistance.


PAINTING 09 9100-13

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

END OF SECTION


PAINTING 09 9100-14



DRY MARKERBOARDS 10 1100-1

SECTION 10 1100 DRY MARKER BOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide markerboards.

B. Wood Blocking - Section 06 2000

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. List areas in conjunction with plans and elevations.

1. Show location of panel joints.2. Show location of special-purpose graphics for visual display surfaces.3. Include sections of typical trim members.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated (manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors and textures available) and as follows:

1. Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet, visual display wall panel, visual display fabric.

2. Fabric swatches of vinyl fabric-faced tack assemblies.3. Samples of accessories involving color selection.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of motor-operated, sliding visual display unit manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display surface through one source from a single manufacturer.



C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display surfaces and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

D. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fabrics with the surface-burning characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.


A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards, including factory-applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display units vertically with packing materials between each unit.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating visual display surfaces without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

C. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work.

1.07 GUARANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.b. Surfaces become slick or shiny.c. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.



2. Warranty Period: Life of the building. As long as they are installed and used, or forever, whichever occurs first.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide drymarker board and trim assemblies as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

1. Claridge Products and Equipment Inc.2. Best-Rite Manufacturing3. Platinum Visual Systems4. Marsh Industries, Inc.5. Newline Products6. K-Pro Specialty Products

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Porcelain enamel face sheet: ASTM A424 enameling grade steel cleaned and both faces treated with 1.7 to 2.5 mil ground coat of ceramic frit and fired. Color cover coat applied to exposed face and edges and fired. Porcelain enamel sheet factor laminated to particleboard backing.

1. Marker boards glass surface 3.0 – 4.0 mil cover coat fired to not less than 1450F. as recommended by manufacturer. Low Gloss

B. Particleboard: ASTM A208.1 Grade I-M-1 free of urea formaldehyde.

C. Aluminum trim: ASTM B221 extruded aluminum clear anodized finish, AA-M12C22A31 per Aluminum Association.

2.03 TRIM

A. Trim factory fabricated and shall be prefinished of extruded aluminum conforming to 6063-T5 alloy complete with top, bottom, side, and mullion trim. Perimeter trim shall be about 5/8" wide. Top trim shall have integral continuous hanger which fits over continuous wall hanger. Assembly fasteners concealed.

2.04 MARKER TRAYS

A. Marker trays shall be magnetic and removable consisting of 18-inch long by 2 ½” wide heavy duty aluminum with angle cut ends and powder coat finish. Manufactured by Mag Tray, Marsh Industries, Newline Products, or Platinum Visual Systems. Provide one tray at each markerboard indicated on drawings.



2.05 FABRICATION

A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.

B. Visual Display Boards: Factory assemble visual display boards, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

C. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint spline system between abutting sections of markerboards.

3. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated.

D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. Miter corners to neat, hairline closure.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display surfaces.

C. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

B. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, and substances that will impair bond between visual display boards, visual display fabric, and surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. See plans (elevations).

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.

END OF SECTION


WALL PROTECTION 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Corner guards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size 4” x 4” minimum.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall-protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.




A. Store impact-resistant wall-protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.2. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until

plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.3. Store wall-guard in a horizontal position.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall-protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Products: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 10 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 8-foot- long units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material, thickness as indicated.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T5.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.



D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source limitations: Obtain wall-door protection products from a single source from a single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturers:

1. InPro Series 130 corner guards.2. C/S Acrovyn equal to above.3. Koroseal Interior Products equal to above.

2.3 CORNER GUARDS (CG)

A. Surface-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner or edge guards: assembly consisting of snap-on, resilient plastic cover installed over retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with end mount, 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.100-inch wall thickness.

a. Profile: Nominal 3-inch- long leg with a 1/4-inch corner radius.b. Height: provide 4’-0’ high unless noted otherwise on drawings.c. Color and Texture: see finish schedule.

2. Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.3. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.4. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching

cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thickness of components.

B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished work.

1. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation.

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice

aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches.

c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.

B. Do not install recessed corner-and end-guard covers until after installation of vinyl wall coverings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.



B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.



TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES AND MIRRORS 10 2800-1

SECTION 10 2800 - TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES AND MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide toilet room accessories and mirrors in restrooms. Provide towel dispensers at sinks as shown other than in toilet rooms and specified herein.

B. Provide all installation hardware, screws, anchors, bolts and accessories.

C. Where product is supplied by Owner, the Contractor shall install item.

D. Related Sections

1. Blocking in Partitions - Sections 06 1000, 09 25002. Under Lavatory Guards - refer to drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data giving complete description of each item.

B. When requested provide one sample of each product which will be held until materials arrive on the job for quality comparison.

C. Provide drawings to General Contractor showing size of openings and blocking for accessories. Include mounting height.


A. All products shall be best quality of the specified item, free of burrs, scratches and other imperfections. In general all products shall be of a single manufacturer, except where specific product is mentioned.


A. Products shall be carefully packaged to prevent damage to finish. Keep products protected after installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Produ t pecified are by:

1. American Specialties, Inc. (American) (preferred for grab bars)2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Bobrick)3. Bradley Washroom Accessories (Bradley)4. General Accessory Manufacturing Company (Gamco)

2.02 GRAB BARS

A. Grab bars shall be 1 1/2" o.d., 18 gauge, heavy duty, .050 wall thickness, Type 304, stainless steel where shown on the drawings. The bars shall be welded to 3" diameter stainless steel flange, secured with three vandal resistant stainless steel screws. Snap flange stainless steel escutcheon to cover mounting plate. Bars shall conform to Federal Specification WW-P-541/8A, Type IV, Class 2. Surface shall be peened, non-slip, grip type along bar. Balance of bar to be satin finish.

2.03 MIRRORS

A. Mirrors shall be of size shown on the drawings. Frame shall be one-piece, roll formed, 3/4" x 3/4", heavy gauge, Type 304, stainless steel. Frame has continuous integral stiffener on all sides for added strength. Interior edge bevels into mirror glass. Corners heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth. Glass shall be 1/4" polished plate glass, #1 quality, electrolytically copper plated. Guaranteed against silver spoilage for 15 years. Mirror edges protected against chipping. Back is to be 20 gauge galvanized steel. Install with theftproof hangers.

2.04 TOILET TISSUE HOLDER

A. Toilet Tissue Holder – Provided by Owner and installed by Contractor

2.05 SOAP DISPENSER

A. Soap Dispenser – Provided by Owner and installed by Contractor

2.06 NAPKIN DISPOSAL

A. Satin finish 22 gauge stainless steel, with removable lockable stainless steel insert.

1. Single Compartment – Surface Mounted



a. American – 0852b. Bobrick – B-270c. Bradley – 4722-15d. Gamco – ND5

2.07 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER

A. Paper Towel Dispenser – Provided by Owner and installed by Contractor

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings and blocking is proper before installing accessories. This also includes products provided by the Owner for installation by Contractor.

B. Verify that openings and reinforcing in toilet partitions is proper.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Locate accessory according to proper dimensions. Verify location and height for accessories used by physically disabled. Accessories shall be level, plumb and straight.

B. Use screws to secure accessory into blocking for maximum pull out resistance. Toggle bolts into drywall not acceptable. Use care to avoid damage to finish of walls.

C. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, accessories shall be mounted as follows: Dimensions are to centerline of fixture.

1. Grab bars 34" from floor2. Soap dispensers 36" from floor3. Toilet paper holder 20" from floor4. Towel dispenser 46" from floor to towel or operator unless over counter in which case

mount at 38".

D. Provide universal keyway for all keyed accessories. Provide six (6) keys.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Remove all wrapping material, tape, tape residue, labels, etc. and wipe clean. Final polish cleaning of mirrors by General Contractor.

END OF SECTION


WINDOW TREATMENTS 12 2000 - 1

SECTION 12 2000 – WINDOW TREATMENTS

PART 1 - SCOPE

A. Manually aluminum 1” horizontal louver shades including mounting and operating hardware to match Facility Standard.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories.



B. Shop Drawings: For horizontal louver blinds, include fabrication and installation details.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (300 mm) long.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated.

1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long.3. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide by 24

inches (600 mm) long.


A. Product Test Reports: For horizontal louver blinds with polymer slats that have been tested for compliance with NFPA 701, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet-work and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Valley2. Graber

B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radius corners.

1. Width: 1”.2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard.3. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard.4. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish.5. Features:

a. Lift-Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and located near back (outside) edge of slat to maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps between slats.

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrails fully enclose operating mechanisms on three sides.

1. Capacity: One blind(s) per headrail unless otherwise indicated.2. Ends: Manufacturer's standard.3. Manual Lift Mechanism:

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11885



a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within blind full operating range.

b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord pull.

4. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders.

a. Tilt: Full.b. Operator: Clear-plastic wand.c. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch

to prevent over rotation of gear.

5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Manufacturer's standard.6. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: Manufacturer's standard unless

otherwise indicated.7. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face.

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of ladders and lift cords and has plastic- or metal-capped ends.

1. Type: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord.

F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag.

1. Type: Braided cord.

G. Valance: Manufacturer's standard.

H. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated.

1. Type: As indicated.2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support

spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind.

I. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.

J. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard.

K. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss:

1. Slats: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching

or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated.

a. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to prevent over rotation of gear.



2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C):

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch (13 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).

2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

C. Concealed Components: Non-corrodable or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated.

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.

F. Color-Coated Finish:

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm) from interior faces of glass and not closer than 1/2 inch (13 mm) from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds.

2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails.3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent

construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings.

B. Electrical Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Installation

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.2. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true. Allow proper clearances for

window operation hardware.

END OF SECTION


PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0507-1

SECTION 23 05 07 – PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Scope of work is to reconnected relocated hot water reheat coils to existing hot water piping. Match existing materials.

B. Included in this section are:

1. Pipe, fittings and joining methods.2. Dielectric connectors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS

A. Steel pipe and fittings and joints shall be:

1. Type S1 Pipe -Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A-53, Types E and F. Fittings and joints -150 lb., seamless steel welding type and malleable iron or cast iron screwed fittings and joints.

2. Reinforced forged welding outlets equal to Bonney Weldolet or Threadolet shall be used where branch is two sizes smaller than the main. Unreinforced nipples and fish mouthed connections are not acceptable.

B. Copper tubing, conforming to ASTM B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube and Fittings and Joints, shall be:

1. Type C1 Pipe -Type "L" seamless hard drawn copper tubing. Fittings -wrought copper or cast bronze, solder ends. Joints -soldered with lead-free tin alloy, 95-5 tin-antimony or silver-bearing tin equal to Harris "Stay-Brite", "Stay-Brite 8" or "Bridgit".

2. Type C4 Pipe -Type "L" seamless hard drawn copper tubing. Fittings -wrought or cast DWV, solder ends. Joints -soldered with lead-free tin alloy, 95-5 tin-antimony or silver-bearing tin equal to Harris "Stay-Brite", "Stay-Brite 8" or "Bridgit".

C. Polypropylene piping, Aquatherm, Climatherm Faser-composite pipe conforming to ASTM F2389 is acceptable for use in all hydronic piping applications.

D. Unions and flanges shall be:

1. Unions on copper tubing, all bronze construction 150 lb., solder ends2. Unions on steel pipe 2 inch and smaller, malleable iron with ground seat, bronze

to steel, 300 lbs., screwed ends.



3. Flanges on steel pipe with welded or screwed joints, 2.50 inches and larger. Gaskets shall be 0.0625 inch thickness full face compressed sheet suitable for temperature and pressure ranges of the application. Bolts for flanges in all steam piping shall be No. 7 hardened bolts.

E. Dielectric connectors are required at each connection between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Insulating materials shall be suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperature. Connectors shall be one or more of the following:

1. Brass adaptor.2. Dielectric Couplings: Dielectric coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg. F. continuous service. Victaulic Clearflow Waterway Style 47, Lochinvar Corp. “V-Line” dielectric fitting, or equal by Calpico, Inc.

3. A shut-off valve shall be provided locally on the system side of the coupling, so that repairs can be made without shutting down the entire system.

4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures and suitable for 225 deg. F. or higher. Acceptable manufacturers are: Capitol Manufacturing, Inc., Epco Sales, Inc., Watts Industries, Inc., and Water Products Division.

F. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly, Include flanges, full-face-or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers, all suitable for 225 deg. F continuous service or higher. Acceptable manufacturers are: Advance Products & Systems, Inc., Calpico, Inc. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 or 300 psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Pipe and tubing shall be cut and fabricated to field measurements and run parallel to normal building lines. Pipe ends shall be cut square and ends reamed to remove burrs. The pipe interior shall be cleaned of foreign matter before erection of the pipe.

B. Mechanically formed tee fittings and couplings of the T-Drill type on copper tubing shall be formed in a continuous operation using equipment specifically designed for the application in strict adherence to the manufacturer’s instructions. Multiple T-drill fittings shall not be installed from the same pipe within 3 diameters. Cutting debris shall be removed from the piping on completion. Joints shall be brazed

C. Piping shall be pitched for drainage. The low points shall be fitted with a 0.75 in. drain valve (with hose thread adapter if not piped to a floor drain) except that on piping 1.25 in. and smaller where a drain valve is not shown, a drain plug is acceptable. Hose thread adapters on drain valves of potable water piping shall be fitted with a non-removable vacuum breaker.

D. Piping shall be installed consistent with good piping practice and run concealed wherever possible. Coordinate with other trades to attain a workmanlike installation.



E. Piping with mechanical joints for grooved end steel pipe shall be supported in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe alignment in both the horizontal and vertical must be tightly maintained. Misalignment must be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer before insulation is applied and the system accepted.

F. Internals of sweat end valves shall be removed when damage or warping could occur due to applied heat of soldering. Where silver brazing is specified, solder connection of valves shall be used to reduce the danger of damage.

G. Piping within 2 ft. of the coil connections to small heating and/or cooling units, reheat box coils and duct coils shall be Type "K" soft copper or flexible tubing with a braided stainless jacket to facilitate connection in a confined space. Joints in soft copper shall be brazed or soldered (consistent with the piping system) or flared-tubing fittings shall be used where appropriate.

H. Piping shall not be run above electrical switchgear or panelboards, nor above the access space in the immediate vicinity of the equipment, in accordance with the National Electric Code (N.E.C.).

I. Unions and flanges shall be installed at pipe connections to fixtures and equipment and as required for erection purposes. A union shall be installed at each threaded shut-off valve on the side of the valve for which shut-off service is intended.

J. Dielectric connectors shall be provided at all locations described herein, at each connection between ferrous and non-ferrous piping, and as shown on the drawings. A shutoff valve shall be provided locally, on the system side of all dielectric couplings, so that repairs can be made easily on these fittings without shutting down the entire system.

END OF SECTION


FLEXIBLE HVAC PIPE CONNECTORS 23 0550-1

SECTION 23 0550 – FLEXIBLE HVAC PIPE CONNECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Flexible pipe connectors shall be of the size and extent required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Flexible pipe connectors shall be corrugated metal with woven wire braid jacket.

B. Flexible metallic pipe connectors shall be constructed of seamless corrugated inner tubing of Type 321 stainless steel or tin-bronze, woven wire braid outer jacket of the same alloy and flanged or screwed ends. Rated working pressure and live hose length shall be safely in excess of the duty imposed.

C. Pipe connectors shall be equal to Mason BSS or Metraflex ML.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Flexible pipe connectors and piping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Piping shall be aligned (both axially and radially), movement of piping shall be confined and flange spacing set so as to not stress the connector or piping.

END OF SECTION


FLEXIBLE HVAC PIPE CONNECTORS 23 0550-2



IDENTIFICATION OF HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-1

SECTION 23 0553 – IDENTIFICATION OF HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Identification of HVAC equipment shall consist of equipment labeling, pipe and duct marking and valve tagging.

B. Each item of major equipment shall be labeled including VAV boxes and other similar equipment.

C. Pipe markings shall be applied to all piping and duct markings shall be applied to all ductwork

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Equipment labeling shall be either, or a mix, of the following:

1. Permanently attached engraved brass or plastic laminated signs with 1 in. high lettering. Signs on exterior equipment shall be brass.

2. Stencil painted identification, 2 in. high letters, with standard fiberboard stencils and standard black (or other appropriate color) exterior stencil enamel.

B. Pipe markings shall be:

1. Plastic semi-rigid snap-on type, manufacturer's standard pre-printed color coded pipe markers extending fully around the pipe and insulation or pressure-sensitive vinyl markers.

2. On piping and insulation 6 in. and greater diameter, full band or strip-type markers fastened to the pipe or insulation with laminated or bonded application or by color-coded plastic tape not less than 1.50 in. wide, full circle at both ends of the marker.

3. Arrows for direction of flow provided integral with the pipe marker or separate at each marker.

C. Duct markings shall be laminated plastic color-coded pressure sensitive vinyl tape, 2.50 in. width, 3 mils minimum thickness. Identification shall include service (supply, return, exhaust, outside air) and direction of flow.

D. Duct access panel markings shall be similar to duct markings to identify the device (fire damper, smoke damper, control damper, smoke detector, etc.)

E. Valve tags shall be polished brass or plastic laminate with solid brass S hook. Tags shall be engraved with "P", “F”, or “H” (for plumbing, fire suppression or HVAC) and the designated number



PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Identification labeling, marking and tagging shall be applied after insulation and painting has been completed.

B. The Plumbing, Fire Suppression and HVAC Contractors shall coordinate labeling, marking and tagging.

C. Equipment labeling shall coordinate with unit designations as shown on submitted drawings.

D. Valve tags shall be placed on each valve except those intended for isolation of individual items of equipment. Valve tag schedules shall be prepared as specified above. Copies of one set of schedules shall be framed under glass or plastic and placed where directed by the Owner. Other sets shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals

E. Pipe and duct markers shall be placed:

1. At each piece of equipment2. At 25 ft. centers in mechanical rooms and concealed spaces, but at least once per room3. At 50 ft. centers in other exposed locations4. On mains at each branch take-off5. On duct access panels

F. Pipe band colors and letters for Mechanical Systems shall be as follows:

STEAM BLACK BANDS ABBREVIATION

High pressure steam Black-Red STM-HI

Med. Pressure steam Black-Yellow STM-MED

Low pressure steam Black-Orange STM-LOW

High pressure return Black-Purple STM-HPR

Pumped condensate return Black-Green P.C.R.

Condensate drain Black-White C.D.

HEATING YELLOW

Hot water heating supply Yellow-Red H.W.H.S.

Hot water return Yellow-Orange H.W.H.R.

AIR CONDITIONING

GREEN

Refrigerant piping Green-Red REF.

Chilled water supply Green-White CH.W.S.

Chilled water return Green-Yellow CH.W.R.

Condensate water supply Green-Orange C.W.S.

Condenser water return Green-Purple C.W.R.



HEAT RECOVERY

PURPLE

Heat recovery water supply Yellow - White G.S.

Heat recovery water return Yellow - Blue G.R.

END OF SECTION


TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-1

SECTION 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Air and water balancing of the systems shall be performed as a part of the HVAC Contract. Balancing work shall be performed by qualified personnel of a member firm of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or approved equal.

B. Methods, procedures, equipment, certifications, report forms and reporting information shall be in accordance with the standards of AABC and latest addition of the SMACNA TAB Procedural Guide and industry practice.

C. When project is in phases and partial occupancy is planned, determine process to allow balancing work to be completed before occupancy.

D. Verify that all equipment start-up services have been completed before the beginning of any balancing work. After initial start-up has been completed the HVAC contractor shall inform the Balancing Sub-Contractor that the systems are operating properly, that all safety interlocks and protective devices are functioning, and the systems are ready to be balanced.

E. After completion of the balancing work, a full report shall be prepared in pencil and two copies (only) submitted to the Engineer for preliminary review. After review, additional balancing, adjustments, drive replacements, readings and recordings deemed necessary shall be done and the report revised. Six typed copies of the final report shall be submitted thru the HVAC Contractor to the Engineer for review and approval. An approved copy of the report shall be included in each set of operating and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - EXECUTION – AIR BALANCE

A. Measure and record the following:

1. Record nameplate data from fan, motor, and air handling cabinet.2. Record and measure fan and motor sheaves indicating number and size of belts

along with center-to-center distances.3. Test and record actual operating fan rpm.4. Measure and record actual running amperage.5. Measure velocity reading across coils, filters, and dampers on the intake side of

the fan. Include data in the report.6. Measure and record vibration on supply and return fans.

B. Each air supply, return, and exhaust system, when installation is completed, including the installation of clean filters, shall be set in operation for balancing. Determine the best location in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. Each air outlet and inlet device, item of equipment (fans, air control units, etc.), and system shall be balanced to the quantities listed on the drawings within plus or minus 10 percent of design requirements.



C. Total air quantities of the supply fan, and the return fan, exhaust fan shall be determined by pitot tube traverse. Where impossible to take good pitot tube traverses of duct system, use total sum of terminal device air volume readings. Final settings of fan speeds shall be determined with variable speed drives at full speed. Refer to item 6 above for drive change out requirements and the items below.

D. Adjust drive pulleys (if applicable) to attain fan speed required for the installed condition. Upon final determination of proper operating speed adjustable pulleys shall be removed and replaced with fixed pitch pulleys. Pulleys and belts of fixed drives and of adjustable drives not having sufficient adjustment range shall be changed out by the HVAC Contractor, at the direction of the Balancing Sub-Contractor, to obtain fan speed required for the installed condition. Labor /or materials required to make the recommended changes shall be included in the HVAC Contract.

E. The Balancing Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with the Contractor in setting supply and return fan inlet vanes / variable frequency drives/ and / outside air, return air and vent air dampers. Supply air systems shall have ampere reading measured in the full heating, full cooling and economizer modes to determine the maximum brake horsepower.

F. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing damper. Report any issues with stratification, poor mixing or short circuiting from one air stream to the other.

G. The report shall include, but not be limited to, both actual and design fan cfm, rpm, brake HP, entering and leaving static pressures, motor data, voltage and amperage and drive information. System air flows by device, terminal, branch and system shall be reported.

H. Mark equipment and balancing device setting with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-controls levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final setting.

I. Pressurization measurements shall not start till the Balancing Sub-Contractor has observed the space to verify the integrity of the space boundaries. Test shall measure, adjust and record the pressurization of each room, each zone and each building. If buildings are being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and adjust the controls to achieve the desired set point.

PART 3 - EXECUTION – WATER BALANCE

A. Each water circulating system, when installation is completed, shall be set in operation for balancing. Water flow thru each pump, chiller, coil, heat exchange device, balancing valve and water flow meter shall be determined by pressure differential gauging or direct reading. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Flows shall be balanced within plus or minus 5 percent of design requirements.



B. Verify the following:

1. Verify, compare, and record expansion tank set-up and data to design requirements for proper operation. Report any deviations to the HVAC Contractor for corrective action.

2. Verify and record makeup-water-station pressure settings for adequate pressure3. Verify flow-control valves and set to indicated flow.4. Verify air has been vented from system. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow

exiting from vents when manually operated.5. Record water flow rate and water pressure drop at water coils.6. Verify and record actual and design water quantities, pressures in and out of

each device, pump motor data, operating voltage and amperage and pump curves.

C. Measure indoor wet and dry-bulb temperatures periodically for 2 successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone to prove correctness of final temperature settings

D. Mark equipment and balancing device setting with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including valve-control positions, valve position indicators and similar controls and devices, to show final setting.

END OF SECTION


HVAC INSULATION 23 0716-1

SECTION 23 07 16 - HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Piping systems shall be insulated as described below. Pipe, fittings, unions, flanges, mechanical joint couplings, valves, devices, specialties and related items in the piping systems shall be insulated unless otherwise noted, with access maintained to P/T test ports, strainer caps, air vents, and similar accessories thru the use of removable and reusable caps, plugs and fittings.

B. HVAC piping shall be covered with insulation of thickness listed, to meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1, latest publication.

C. Hot water piping connecting to duct coils and air terminal unit coils shall be insulated up to the coil shut-off valves, and insulated with vapor barrier maintained from the coil to a point 6 in. from the coil. The piping and accessories between these points shall remain uninsulated for ease of access.

D. ASJ+ or approved equal shall be provided on insulation provided for piping and ductwork located in mechanical spaces. ASJ+ backed insulation or approved equal is acceptable for straight runs with PVC protective covers for elbows and fittings; where fitting insulation cannot be covered/protected, a jacket type insulating material may be used to meet or exceed ASHRAE standards.

E. Couplings shall be considered as a part of the pipe line and shall be insulated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. All materials must be asbestos free.

B. Insulation shall be manufactured by Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Certainteed or Armstrong.

C. Fiberglass pipe insulation shall be factory molded tubular type with “all service” jacket having an integral vapor barrier. Longitudinal joints of the jacket shall be over-lapping with factory applied adhesive. Butt joints shall be sealed with 3 in. wide ASJ pressure sensitive tape. Insulation shall be GreenGuard Certified for low formaldehyde and VOC emissions.

D. Fiberglass board insulation shall be 3pcf density with factory applied “all service” jacket having an integral vapor barrier.

E. ASJ+ or approved equal shall be applied to the exterior of all insulated equipment. ASJ+ backed insulation or approved equal is acceptable for straight runs with PVC protective covers for elbows and fittings; where fitting insulation cannot be covered/protected, a jacket type insulating material may be used to meet or exceed ASHRAE standards.



F. Fittings, valves, flanges and other devices, both exposed and concealed, requiring insulation shall be covered same thickness as pipe insulation with any of the following (except when removable insulation covers are specified):

1. Provide high-density half-round insulation at all pipe support locations to minimize insulation crushing.

2. Factory molded insulation cover with PVC one-piece fitting cover3. Miter-cut segments of pipe insulation, held in place with adhesive and/or wire,

filled with insulating cement smoothed to shape and covered with PVC one-piece fitting cover

4. Fiberglass blanket insulation, held in place and covered with PVC one-piece fitting cover.

5. Oversized pipe insulation, where applicable, finished same as straight run pipe insulation.

G. Couplings shall be considered as a part of the line and shall be insulated. Bidders on the insulation work are cautioned to verify during the bidding period the extent of this work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Fiberglass board insulation shall be secured with weld pins and fasteners, 12 inches on center maximum, and joints sealed with 3-inch-wide ASJ pressure sensitive tape. Tank ends shall be blocked in with insulation, pinned, and finished with ASJ + jacketing.

B. Fiberglass pipe insulation shall be applied with sealed overlapping longitudinal joints and, if necessary, secured with staples and mastic. Butt joints shall be sealed with 3-inch-wide ASJ pressure sensitive tape.

C. Mineral wool insulation shall be wired in place and joints and cracks filled with insulating cement. 0.50 in. thickness insulating cement shall be applied, shaped and smoothed and finished with glass lagging cloth and mastic.

D. Calcium silicate blocks shall be applied, wired or banded in place and joints and cracks filled with insulating cement. 0.50 in. thickness insulating cement shall be applied, shaped and smoothed and finished with glass lagging cloth and mastic.

E. Overlap and seal all longitudinal joints. Tape and seal cross joints. Vapor barrier shall be continuous on insulation of all cold services. Vapor barrier type mastic shall be used where needed to maintain a vapor seal, including over staples.

F. Where insulation is terminated, insulation shall be beveled at 45 degrees and the beveled surface sealed with vapor barrier mastic. PVC caps over straight cut ends which have been vapor sealed shall be used in lieu of beveling.

G. Insulation on cold service piping shall be run thru floor and wall sleeves to maintain vapor barrier continuity. Insulation on other services shall likewise be run continuous when sleeve size permits. Provide insulation and vapor barrier on and around supports for pipe risers of services which require vapor seal so as to prevent sweating.



H. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened periodically or maintenance.

I. Protective jacketing shall be applied over insulation on piping, fittings, valves and devices as specified above. All joints and seams of the jacket located outside shall be sealed watertight.

END OF SECTION



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLAND


HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113-1

SECTION 23 2113 – HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. This Section specifies the hydronic piping system, including associated fittings, and specialties within the building.

B. Related Sections: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

C. Reference Documents:

1. ASTM F 2389-07 - Standard Specification for Pressure-rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems

2. CSA B137.11 - Polypropylene (PP-R) Pipe and Fittings for Pressure Applications3. NSF/ANSI 14 – Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials

D. Definitions: Definitions shall be in accordance with local mechanical codes and ASTM F 2389.

E. Quality Assurance:

1. Material shall be certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11.

2. Material shall comply with manufacturers specifications.3. Special Engineered products shall be certified by NSF International as complying

with NSF 14.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Pipe and piping products:

1. Base bid: Pipe shall be Type L drawn-temper copper tubing (ASTM B 88) or schedule 40 black steel pipe with plain ends: ASTM A53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40.

2. Alternate: Pipe shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11. The pipe shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. All pipe shall be made in a three-layer extrusion process. Domestic hot water and heating piping shall contain a fiber layer (faser) to restrict thermal expansion. All pipe shall comply with the rated pressure requirements of ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11. All pipe shall be certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11.



3. Pipe (Alternate) shall be Aquatherm® Climatherm® or Climatherm® Faser®, available from Aquatherm, Inc. Piping specifications and ordering information are available at www.aquathermpipe.com.

B. Fittings:

1. Base: Fittings shall be manufactured from:

a. Wrought-Copper, ASME B16.22.b. Wrought-Steel, ASME A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoin pipe.

2. Alternate: Fittings shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389. The fittings shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. All fittings shall be certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11.

3. Fittings (Alternate) shall be Aquatherm® Climatherm® available from Aquatherm, Inc. Fittings specifications and ordering information are available at www.aquathermpipe.com.

C. Warranty:

1. Manufacturer shall warrant pipe and fittings for 10 years to be free of defects in materials or workmanship.

2. Warranty shall cover labor and material costs of repairing and/or replacing defective materials and repairing any incidental damage caused by failure of the piping system due to defects in materials or workmanship.

D. Integral thermal and vapor barrier:

1. Where up to 1 inch of standard insulation is indicated on the drawings or in these specifications, a factory installed, thermal (radiant, conductive, and convective) and vapor barrier insulation shall be provided. Where more than 1 inch of standard insulation is indicated on the drawings or in these specifications, additional overlap of factory installed, thermal (radiant, conductive, and convective) and vapor barrier insulation shall be provided to ensure equivalent thermal resistance. The thick wall, self-insulating fittings do not require an additional vapor barrier for the piping system to meet this performance level. The thermal barrier is UV resistant, CFC-free, non-porous, non-fibrous, and resist mold growth. The pipe with the integral thermal barrier with standard unprotected fittings shall meet the ASTM E84 and the CAN/ULC S102.2 requirements for a Flame Spread Rating of 25 and Smoke Development rating of 50.

http://www.aquathermpipe.com/

http://www.aquathermpipe.com/



PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Piping applications: Install listed pipe materials and joining methods below in the following applications:

1. Aboveground: Polypropylene (PP-R) piping in SDR 6, 7.4 or 11 based on the required minimum pressure rating and use temperature.

B. Fusion welding of joints:

1. Install fittings and joints using socket-fusion, electrofusion, or butt-fusion as applicable for the fitting or joint type. All fusion-weld joints shall be made in accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer’s specifications and product standards.

2. Fusion-weld tooling, welding machines, and electrofusion devices shall be as specified by the pipe and fittings manufacturer.

3. Prior to joining, the pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with F 2389 and the manufacturer’s specifications.

4. Joint preparation, setting and alignment, fusion process, cooling times and working pressure shall be in accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer’s specifications.

C. Valve applications:

1. Install ball valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more equipment connections and where indicated.

2. Install ball valves on inlet to each equipment item and elsewhere as indicated.3. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and

where required to drain hydronic piping system.4. Install ball valves in each hot-water circulating loop and discharge side of each

pump.

D. Piping installations:

1. Install hangers and supports at intervals specified in the applicable Plumbing or Mechanical Code and as recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2. Support vertical piping at each floor and as specified in the applicable Plumbing or Mechanical Code.

3. Fire stopping shall be provided to both be compatible with the Aquatherm Piping and meet the requirements of ASTM E 814 or ULC S115, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops”. Pipe insulations or fire resistive coating shall be removed where the pipe passes through a fire stop and, if required by the firestop manufacturer, for 3 inches beyond the firestop outside of the fire barrier.

E. Piping installations:

1. The pipes should be flushed with cold water after finishing the installation. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction and as specified by the piping system manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.3. Sheet metal materials.4. Duct liner.5. Sealant and gaskets.6. Hangers and supports.7. Manual dampers


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.2. Sealants and gaskets.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing



requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180).2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K)] at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.033 W/m x K)] at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.



B. Natural-Fiber Duct Liner: 85 percent cotton, 10 percent borate, and 5 percent polybinding fibers, treated with a microbial growth inhibitor and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.034 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature when tested according to ASTM C 518.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84; certified by an NRTL.

3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

C. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick stainless steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure

butted-edge overlapping.5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners

of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges.b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher

than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.

7. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.



2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches (76 mm).3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 2-inch wg, positive and negative.7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum.10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.2. Type: S.3. Grade: NS.4. Class: 25.5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."



C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

2.7 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.2. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.b. Mitered and welded corners.c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

3. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.

4. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.5. Bearings:

a. Stainless-steel sleeve.b. Dampers in ducts shall have axles full length of damper blades and

bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

6. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.



2.8 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

C. Vane Construction: Single wall.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm)

in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.



G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

L. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

M. Connect diffusers to ducts with maximum 12 inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes in accordance with Duct Schedule.



3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

C. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors.

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected downstream of Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg (250 Pa).b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.



c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

B. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: SMACNA Leakage Class for

Round and Flat Oval: 12.

C. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg (250 Pa).b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

D. Liner:

1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I or Natural fiber, 1 inch (25 mm)] thick.2. Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I or Natural fiber, 1 inch (25 mm)] thick.

E. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.



2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or Welded.

F. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.



2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap.b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap.c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

END OF SECTION


AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616-1

SECTION 23 3616 – AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Existing air control terminal units to be relocated are hot water reheat, variable air volume units with control damper and velocity sensor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Support the units from the building structure with solid steel hanger rods or sheet metal strap hangers from corner points of unit, minimum 4, such that unit is self-supporting. Units shall not be supported from the duct system or piping system or ceiling suspension system.

B. The air control terminal box locations must be coordinated with all elements that shall be in or above the ceiling. This includes but is not limited to HVAC piping, plumbing piping, conduit, wiring, junction boxes, pull boxes, lighting fixtures, sprinkler heads, cable tray, speakers, smoke detectors air devices, etc. In no case shall the Contractor mount an air control terminal above a lighting fixture, speaker, diffuser or any other device mounted on the ceiling without written permission from the University. Provide ceiling access panels where the ceiling system does not afford ready access.

C. Provide a manual-automatic air vent at the coil

D. The VAV box manufacturer shall provide the box with air flow taps for connection to the air flow sensor. Reheat boxes shall be provided with 2-way or 3-way modulating valves. Provide supply air temperature sensor at the discharge of each VAV box, for monitoring and troubleshooting purposes.

1. VAV Reheat Control – When room temperature rises above the cooling set point, the box damper shall modulate open until the maximum cooling cfm are achieved. Hot water valve shall remain closed. As room temperature drops below cooling set point, the box damper shall modulate closed, down to the cooling minimum cfm scheduled. If room temperature drops to the heating set point, the box control shall change to heating mode. While box damper is at the cooling min. cfm, the hot water control valve shall begin to modulate open. When valve reaches 50% open the box damper shall begin to modulate open, tracking the valve position until valve reaches full open at the same time the box damper reaches the heating cfm. Local control of set points shall be limited to the following ranges via programming: heating set point 70 – 74 deg. F; cooling set point 72 – 76 deg. F.

2. During unoccupied hours, each VAV box damper shall limit the airflow thru the box to not more than 50 percent (adjustable) of the scheduled max. cfm.


AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616-2

3. Energy Management -Each VAV box shall have its own time of day schedule to occupied / unoccupied control. An override pushbutton shall be provided at each sensor thermostat to override the unoccupied schedule for a fixed (programmable) time. The BAS system shall track, log and report on the amount of time each box was overridden as well as VAV box discharge air temperature. Where VAV boxes serve zones, which have occupancy sensors for lighting controls, the same occupancy signal shall be utilized by the BAS to initiate setback temperature when an associated zone is vacant.

END OF SECTION


AIR DIFFUSERS 23 3713 - 1

SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Square ceiling diffusers.2. Perforated grilles.3. Grille.



1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of design is Titus. Acceptable substitutes are Krueger and Price.

2.2 CD-1: SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

B. Material: Steel.

C. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

D. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm).



E. Face Style: Plaque.

F. Mounting: T-bar.

G. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.

H. Dampers: None.

2.3 EG: PERFORATED GRILLE

A. Material: Steel face.

B. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

C. Face Size: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).

D. Duct Inlet: As indicated on drawings.

E. Face Style: Flush.

F. Mounting: T-bar.

2.4 RG: PERFORATED GRILLE

A. Material: Steel face.

B. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

C. Face Size: 24 by 12 inches (600 by 300 mm).

D. Duct Inlet: 22 by 10 inches.

E. Face Style: Flush.

F. Mounting: T-bar.

2.5 SG: SUPPLY GRILLE

A. Adjustable Blade Face Grille:

1. Material: Steel frame, extruded aluminum blades.2. Finish: Baked enamel, white.3. Face Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.4. Core Construction: Integral.5. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.6. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.7. Mounting: Countersunk screw.8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade



2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers are installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-1

SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to Division 22, Division 23, more than one section of Division 26, Division 27, Division 28, Division 33, and Division 34. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 01.

B. Codes and Standards: All equipment, material and installations shall comply with applicable codes, Miami University Design Standards, and installation practices. Comply with the requirements of the applicable local building code, the applicable NEC, all local rules and regulations including those of the fire authorities. Comply with all applicable NFPA standards. All material and equipment shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standard that is applicable for the specific purpose of the material and equipment. The National Electrical Code, National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Standards, and applicable ANSI and IEEE standards shall apply to the pertinent materials, equipment, and installation practices. Testing shall be in accordance with the applicable International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) standards.

C. Permits and Fees: Obtain all permits and inspections required by all laws and regulations or public authority having such jurisdiction. File drawings necessary to obtain permits. Miami University will pay for all permits. Coordinate payment with the University's Project Manager.

D. Coordinate installation, equipment and manufacturers, within all Specifications Sections, with Miami University Design Standards manual.

1.2 INSPECTIONS

A. Obtain all inspections required by all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or public authority having jurisdiction and obtain certificates of such inspections and submit same to the Engineer. Pay all fees, charges and other expenses in connection therein.

B. Before any electrical work is covered, the Engineer will inspect the electrical work completed at that time.

C. Final Inspection - When the Contractor determines all work is completed and working properly per the Contract Documents, the contractor shall request a "Final" inspection by the Engineer in writing. If more than one re-inspection is required after this final inspection, the Contractor shall bear all additional costs, including compensation for the Engineer additional services made necessary thereby. A final inspection will not be made until Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Test Reports are submitted and approved and



all prior "Observation report" punch lists are completed, signed and returned to the Engineer.

D. All work shall be inspected by the local authority having jurisdiction and upon completion of the work, the Electrical Contractor shall furnish to the State Architect, a certificate of inspection and approval from said Department before final payment on the Contract will be allowed. Fee for inspections shall be a part of this Contract.

1.3 OBSERVATION REPORTS

A. During the course of construction, the Engineer will prepare "Observation Reports" with a list of items found to be in need of correction. All items listed shall be corrected by the Contractor. A space is provided on the form for the Contractor to note the completion of each item. All prior "Observation Report" items must be completed, the lists signed and returned to the Engineer prior to making the final inspection. After the final list is issued, the same procedure will apply

1.4 TESTS

A. Refer to section 26 08 00, Commissioning.

B. When the Engineer makes final inspection of all electrical work he will order tests performed as deemed necessary. These tests may include operation of lights and equipment, continuity of conduit system, grounding resistances and insulation resistances and checking out the operation of the various systems. This Contractor shall provide such assistance as required (including manpower and tools) to start and stop the various systems, etc. and simulate control sequences. The Contractor (not the Engineer) is responsible to turn on the systems and demonstrate they are operating properly.

C. Submit data taken during such test to Engineer. Pay all professional engineering fees involved in required testing of equipment.

D. All signaling systems, such as fire alarm shall be checked out and tested by a qualified field representative of equipment vendor. A report shall be submitted to Engineer by vendor representative indicating results of such final check out and test. Final payment will not be approved until such report is submitted.

E. If the Engineer determines that any work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Part 3 - Execution does not include, he will, upon written authorization from the University, instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor shall give timely notice so the Engineer may observe the inspections, tests or approvals. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Engineer additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the University shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.



F. Work shall be unacceptable when found to be defective or contrary to the Plans, Specifications, Codes specified or accepted standards of good workmanship.

G. The Contractor shall promptly correct all work found unacceptable by the Engineer whether observed before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such unacceptable work, including compensation for the Engineer additional services made necessary thereby.

1.5 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements in Section 20 08 00 "Seismic Protection," including required submittals described under Section 20 08 00.

1.6 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submittals are not requested for all products covered in the specifications. Submit only the data requested under the submittals portion of each specification section. Un- requested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. FAX or photo copies are not allowed as submittals for operating and maintenance manuals. Submittals for operating and maintenance manuals must be on original manufacturer printed stock. Non-requirement of submittals, when so noted, is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not relieve the contractor from full compliance with the plans and specifications. Any deviation from specified items is considered a substitution. If the contractor desires to use other than specified items, then a formal request for substitution must be submitted prior to bid date, in accordance with the methods and times indicated in these specifications.

B. Before submitting a shop drawing or any related material to the Engineer, Contractor shall: review each such submission for conformance with the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and operations of construction, and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Contractor; approve each such submission before submitting it; and so stamp each such submission before submitting it.

C. Definitions:

1. Product Data: Pre-printed manufacturer's data.

2. Shop Drawings: Drawings made specifically for the manufacture of a particular piece of equipment to be used on this project.

3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Information containing instructions on the proper operation, maintenance and repair of the equipment, complete with written text, diagrams, photos, exploded views and parts lists.

4. Record Documents: Information indicating the actual installed conditions of the project on Mylar, electronic media, photographs or typed paper. Submit type, quantities and on media specified where indicated to be submitted.



1.7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings and specifications shall be considered as mutually explanatory and complementary. Any electrical work called for by one and not by the other shall be performed as though required by all. All sections and subsections of the Electrical work shall be governed by and subject to the general and supplementary conditions. Any discrepancies in or between the drawings and specifications, or between the drawings and actual field conditions shall be reported to the Engineer/Architect in sufficient time to issue an addendum for clarification.

B. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic, and some circuit runs have been distorted to avoid confusion of lines. However, the drawings indicate the general layout of the complete electrical system. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distance, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.

1.8 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. When two or more items of same material or equipment are required they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in Work, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.

C. Substitutions: Products other than those specified must be submitted as a substitution, at least 15 days prior to bid due date, along with a letter explaining the reason for the substitution. A sample of the proposed substitution shall be submitted to the engineer for the engineer's evaluation when requested by the engineer. This sample shall be supplied at no cost to the engineer, and will be returned to the contractor, at the contractor's expense, at the end of the evaluation period. Substitutions will only be evaluated and considered by the engineer when the engineer's time for such evaluation is paid for by the contractor requesting the substitution. Delivery time problems due to the contractor's failure to order the originally specified items in a timely manner will not be considered as an acceptable reason for substitution.


A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.

B. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.



1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01 Section "Contract Closeout." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate installed conditions for:

1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

4. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location both exterior and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; use and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support and hanger details; Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

5. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions, Change Orders, actual equipment and materials used.

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Refer to the Division 01 Section: “Contract Closeout” or “Operation and Maintenance Data” for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.

B. In addition to the information required by Division 01 for Maintenance Data, include the following information:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions, regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventive maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

1.12 WARRANTIES

A. Refer to the Division 01 Section: “Warranties” for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements.



B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 26, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.

D. This Contractor is responsible for all defects, repairs and replacements in materials and workmanship, for a period of one (1) year after final payment is approved by the Engineer.

E. Product guarantees greater than one (1) year shall be passed along to the Owner for full benefit of the manufacturer's warranty.

1.13 CLEANING

A. Refer to the Division 01 Section: “Contract Closeout” or “Final Cleaning” for general requirements for final cleaning.

1.14 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Coordinate equipment rough-in requirements with Divisions 02 through 23.

1.15 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components.

B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations.

D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

F. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.



G. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform to project requirements and approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer.

H. Systems, materials, and equipment, which will be exposed in finished areas shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components.

I. Install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned.

J. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Maintain code clearances in front of and about all electrical equipment. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

K. Install electrical conduits and cabling in crawl space (interstitial space) as indicated on drawings and for lighting, fire alarm, mechanical equipment, and power circuits located in parking garage. Rough-in conduits for low voltage systems such as CCTV shall also be allowed in crawl space. All conduit and cabling routing shall be coordinated with all other trades.

L. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural components.

M. Include in the work all labor, materials, equipment, services, apparatus, drawings (in addition to the Contract Documents) as required to complete the intended work.

N. Only new, clean and perfect equipment, apparatus, materials and supplies of latest design and manufacture shall be incorporated in the work in order to assure an electrical system of high quality.

O. The work required to be done by the contractor, the utility companies and the owner, in order to obtain utility services such as telephone and electric, is delineated in these specifications and on the drawings. Unless otherwise noted, construction or connection charges (except for temporary power) by those companies shall be paid by the Owner.

1.16 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES

A. In many instances the drawings show an outlet box and power supply for specific equipment, be it Owner or contractor furnished. It is to be understood, unless otherwise noted, that the work includes a connection from the box to the equipment or appliance. Verify circuit conductor quantities and sizes and overcurrent device number of poles and rating as well as any special grounding requirements, for all owner furnished equipment and adjust the required work accordingly.



1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01 Section "Cutting and

Patching." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, the following

requirements apply:

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

b. Remove and replace defective Work.

c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents.

d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.

e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.

f. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components,

and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to, removal of electrical

items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work.

2. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials.

3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application of sealers and access panels and access doors.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown.

C. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.

1.19 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of electrical and communication services with the Owner and the utility companies.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.

E. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.

F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. All lumber shall be fire treated.

B. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent.

C. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as indicated but not less than 15/32 inches.

2.3 ACCESS DOORS

A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

B. Frames: 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.

C. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wide-exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.

D. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: Perforated flanges with wallboard bead.

E. For full-bed plaster applications: Galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame.



F. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.

G. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing mechanism.

H. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.

I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Bar-Co., Inc.

2. J.L. Industries.

3. Karp Associates, Inc.

4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc.

5. Nystrom, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of sealants and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Install equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturer instructions and the requirements in Section 20 08 00 "Seismic Protection."

3.2 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.3 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.



C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.4 APPLICATION OF SEALERS

A. General: Comply with sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to

products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric sealants.

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

C. Apply rated firestopping sealants at all penetrations of fire and smoke walls; at all penetrations of floors and at other locations as noted on the drawings or where required by code. Consider walls that are common to different abutting buildings, to different additions to buildings, and to fire and smoke separations within buildings as requiring fire stopping sealant. Refer to architectural drawings. When in doubt, consult with Engineer or Architect.

1. Submit the following approval before ordering materials for fire stopping:

a. Fire stopping detail, including Underwriters Laboratories System Number, as listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, for each different intended project application, such as cable tray penetration, conduit penetration, penetration of one-hour gypsum penetration, penetration of two hour concrete slab, etc.

b. Fire stopping material manufacturer. This manufacturer must be listed in the applicable UL System Number detail.

c. Submittals for approval by the engineer are not required for other items in this section. Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non- requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not relieve the contractor from full compliance with the plans and specifications.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS

A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

END OF SECTION


LOW-VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519-1

SECTION 26 05 19 – LOW-VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes wires, cables, electrical tape and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for approval by the Engineer are not required for this section. Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non-requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not relieve the CM from full compliance with the plans and specifications.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code:

1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code:"

a. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials.

2. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories under the following standards.

a. UL Std. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cablesb. UL Std. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors

3. NEMA and ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards:

a. WC-5: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy

b. WC-7: Cross Linked Thermosetting



c. Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy

4. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard.

a. Std. 82: Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Insulated tap connector:

1. Blackburn Series IPC2. Buchanon B-Tap

B. Spring Wire Connectors for AWG sizes Number 14 to Number 10 in dry locations:

1. 3M Scotchlok Y, R, G, and B2. Ideal Wingnut3. Thomas & Betts Type PT

C. Threaded on Wire Connectors for AWG sizes Number 8 and larger:

1. Raychem TCS (indoor)2. Raychem WCSM (exterior)

D. Spring Wire Connectors for AWG sizes Number 14 to Number 10 in wet and damp locations:

1. King Technology "One-Step" Model King-4, 5, 6, 9 Silicone-Filled Safety Connectors

E. Below Grade Wiring Connectors:

1. 3M In-Line Cold Shrink Splice.2. King Technology "One-Step" Model King-4, 5, 6, 9 Silicone-Filled Safety

Connectors.

F. For connections of cables to buswork: Use two hole mechanical lugs if space allows, otherwise use one-hole lugs. Lugs to be Burndy universal terminal series KA, K2A or K3A as required or approved equal.

1. Electrical Tape: Use 3M Super #88 electrical tape. 3M #33, #33+ or other tapes are not acceptable.



2.2 WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed.

B. Single Conductors for General Power and Lighting Circuits:

1. Stranding: Provide solid conductors for lighting circuits and non-vibrating power utilization equipment utilizing Number 10 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for Number 8 AWG and larger. Provide stranded conductors, regardless of size, for connections to vibrating equipment such as motors and transformers.

2. Conductors of AWG Number 10 and smaller for lighting circuits and non-vibrating power utilization equipment may be stranded if used with devices, lugs and connectors specifically applicable for stranded conductors. Stranded conductors are not to be used with screw head binding, such as with side wired devices. Proper back-wired or pressure devices UL listed for stranded conductor termination must be used where stranded conductors are selected.

3. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.4. Conductor Material: Copper for all wires and cables.5. Insulation: Provide XHHW or THHN or THWN insulation for all

conductors. Provide XHHW or THWN for all conductors installed outdoors or underground

6. Color Coding for phase identification in accordance with Part 3 below.

C. Wiring for other systems such as fire alarm, paging, communications, etc., shall be as specified in those sections of these specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHOD

A. Use the following wiring methods as indicated:

1. Wire: Install all wire in raceway, except in the following cases:

a. Low voltage conductors to systems such as communications and alarms in attic or crawl space cable tray.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEC.

B. Coordinate cable installation with other Work.

C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant where necessary.

D. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire and cable grips which will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable. Do not exceed maximum tensile strength of conductor or grip. Do not exceed maximum sidewall pressure limitations of cables.

E. Conceal all cable in finished spaces.

F. Keep conductor splices to minimum.

G. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation rating than conductors being spliced.

H. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.

I. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than Number 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no more than 1/8 inch of exposed bare conductor at the terminal.

J. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

K. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

L. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

M. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

N. Use conductor not smaller than Number 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

O. Single conductors used for control circuits shall not be smaller than Number 14 AWG.



P. Feeder conductors shall be continuous and shall not contain splices.

Q. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. Observe NEC 310- 15 (b)(2)(a) adjustment factors.

R. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

S. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors.

1. Install splices and taps which possess equivalent-or-better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced.

2. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.

T. Above grade:

1. Use pre-molded insulated tap connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, Number 8 AWG and larger. Insulate with UL listed insulating cover supplied by same manufacturer as connector.

2. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, Number 10 AWG and smaller.

3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor, or three layers of tape, whichever is greater.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Identify each conductor with its circuit Number or other designation indicated on Drawings.


A. Inspect wire for physical damage and proper connection.

B. Measure tightness of bolted connections with properly scaled and calibrated torque tool and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values.

C. Before energizing, verify continuity and isolation of each branch circuit conductor.



D. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors, as follows:

208Y/120 Volts Phase

Black A

Red B

Blue C

White Neutral

Green Ground

2. Permanently post this identification table at all branch circuit panelboards.

E. Conductor Color Coding Methods: Use conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors except that the following field-applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than Number 6 AWG.

F. For phase conductors:

1. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 4 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1/2 or 3/4 inch-wide 3M Scotch #35 tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.

2. In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored non-conductive cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length.

G. For neutral conductor:

1. Same as for phase conductors except that three continuous white strips, factory applied, may be used. Cable ties not allowed.

2. Neutral wires serving AFCI protected circuits requiring a dedicated neutral shall be white in color and include a permanent stripe or tracer with a color matching phase used.

H. For ground conductor:

1. Same as for phase conductors except that cable ties are not allowed.

I. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits.



J. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning. Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION 26 0519


GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526-1

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for approval by the Engineer of products to be used are not required for this section. Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non-requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not relieve the CM from full compliance with the plans and specifications.

B. Submit the following to the Engineer:

1. Report of field tests and observations of the type indicated under Part 3 - Execution.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled for the specific purposes by Underwriter's Laboratories.

B. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (NEC).

C. UL Standard: Comply with UL 467, "Grounding and Bonding equipment."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Erico Products, Inc.2. Ideal Industries, Inc.3. O-Z/Gedney Co.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.

B. Conductor Materials: Copper.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS

A. General: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power and Cables." Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Copper, green insulated.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper, stranded cable.

D. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B-3.2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B-8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B-33.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS

A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section.

B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, consisting of braided No. 30 gage bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as indicated.



2.5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used.1. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.2. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.3. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the

specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC Article 250 for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated.

B. Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit conductors for all feeders and branch circuits.

C. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an insulated equipment ground conductor in nonmetallic raceways containing power conductors.

D. Signal and Communications: For telephone, alarm, and communication systems, provide a green insulated copper conductor in raceway from the grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet or central equipment location. Size of the conductor shall be minimum #4 copper or as shown on drawings, whichever is larger.

E. Bond electrical system grounding, telephone, CATV, other communications systems, water piping, gas piping, and other piping systems together.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Braided-Type Bonding Jumpers: Install to connect ground clamps on water meter piping to bypass water meters electrically. Use elsewhere for flexible bonding and grounding connections.

B. Route grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage, except as indicated.

C. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment ground conductors of pumps, fans, electric heaters, and air cleaners serving individual systems.



3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis.

B. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

C. Aluminum to steel connections shall be with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps.

D. Aluminum to galvanized steel connections shall be with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.

E. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

F. Exothermic Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections except those at test wells. Install at connections to ground rods and plate electrodes. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

G. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with pressure- type grounding lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bus or lug in the housing. Bond conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.

H. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

I. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.

J. Cable tray and ladder rack shall be bonded at all joints in the cable tray/ladder rack, to communications conduits, sleeves and the telecommunications grounding bus bar with #6 AWG bonding jumper.

END OF SECTION 26 05 26


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 0529-1

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.

B. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific support requirements that may be applicable to specific items.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for approval by the Engineer are not required for this section. Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non-requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not relieve the CM from full compliance with the plans and specifications.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled for the specific intended purpose by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems:

a. Allied Tube & Conduitb. American Electric



c. B-Line Systems, Inc.d. Cinch Clamp Co., Inc.e. GS Metals Corp.f. Haydon Corp.g. Kin-Line, Inc.h. Unistrut Diversified Products

2. Conduit Sealing Bushings:

a. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc.b. Killark Electric Mfg. Co.c. O-Z/Gedneyd. Raco, Inc.e. Red Seal Electric Corp.f. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co.g. Thomas & Betts Corp.

2.2 COATINGS

A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.

B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:

1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.

C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

E. U-Channel Systems: 16-gauge steel channels, with 9/16-inch-diameter holes, between one and one half and two and one half inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture.



2.4 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U- channel components.

B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Interior Dry Locations: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe.

2. Exterior or Interior Wet or Damp Locations: Fabricate from Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements.

B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.

C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:

D. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports.

E. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support.

F. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

G. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers.

H. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits, telephone and data above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4- inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.

I. Space supports for raceways in accordance with Table I of this section. Space supports for raceway types not covered by the above in accordance with NEC.



J. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 3 feet of boxes, access fittings, device boxes, cabinets or other raceway terminations.

K. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.

L. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors.

M. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices.

N. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. Provide insulated bushings at each end of sleeve. For sleeves through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL-listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables.

O. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal.

P. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, motor control centers, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.

2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.



TABLE I: SPACING FOR RACEWAY SUPPORTS

Maximum Spacing of Supports (Feet)

Raceway Size (Inches)

No. of Conduits in Run

Location RMC & IMC*

EMT RNC

1) HORIZONTAL RUNS

1/2, 3/4 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 5 5 3

1/2, 3/4 1 or 2 Where it is difficult to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

7 7 --

1/2, ¾, 1 3 or more Any location. 7 7 --

1 & larger 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 6 6 --

1 & larger 1 or 2 Where it is difficult to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

10 10 --

1 & larger 3 or more Any location. 10 10 --

Any -- Concealed. 10 10 --

2) VERTICAL RUNS

1/2, 3/4 -- Exposed. 7 7 --

1, 1-1/4 -- Exposed. 8 8 --

1-1/2 and larger -- Exposed. 10 10 --

Up to 2 -- Shaftway. 14 10 --

2-1/2 -- Shaftway. 16 10 --

3 & larger -- Shaftway. 20 10 --

Any -- Concealed. 10 10 --

*Maximum spacings for IMC above apply to straight runs only. Otherwise the maximums for EMT apply.

Abbreviations: EMT Electrical metallic tubingIMC Intermediate metallic conduit RMC Rigid metallic conduitRNC Rigid nonmetallic conduit



RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 0533-1

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements in Section 200800 "Seismic Protection."

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. Raceways include the following:

1. Rigid metal conduit2. Intermediate metal conduit3. Rigid non-metallic conduit and duct4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT)5. Flexible metal conduit6. Liquidtight flexible conduit7. Wireway8. Surface raceways9. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following:

a. Device boxesb. Floor boxesc. Outlet boxesd. Pull and junction boxese. Cabinets and hinged cover enclosuresf. Conduit bodies

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for approval by the Engineer are not required for this section. Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non-requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not relieve the contractor from full compliance with the plans and specifications.




A. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific purpose and comply with the following standards:

1. ANSI C80.1 – Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.2. ANSI C80.3 – Electrical Metallic Tubing Zinc Coated.3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and

Cable Assemblies.4. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.5. NECA 1 "Standard practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction (ANSI)."6. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.7. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).8. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.9. NEMA TC 6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.

C. Comply with NECA "Standard of Installation."

D. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways.

B. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch, switch legs may be ½ inch minimum, and fixture heat whips may be 1/2 inch minimum.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Conduit to be seamless, hot dipped galvanized rigid steel. Threads to be cut and ends chamfered prior to galvanizing. Galvanizing to provide zinc coating fused to inside and outside walls of conduit. Provide an enamel lubricating coating on the inside of the conduit. Conduit to conform to ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled under UL 6.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Conduit to be seamless, 6063 alloy, T-1 temper. Conduit to conform to ANSI C80.5 and listed and labeled under UL6.



C. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Conduit to be seamless, hot dipped galvanized rigid steel. Threads to be cut and ends chamfered prior to galvanizing. Galvanizing to provide zinc coating fused to outside walls of conduit. Provide an enamel lubricating coating on the inside of the conduit. Conduit to be listed and labeled under UL 1242.

D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. Couplings for rigid steel conduit and IMC to be single piece threaded, cadmium plated malleable iron. Conduit bodies may be aluminum. Couplings for rigid aluminum conduit to be of aluminum construction, 6063 alloy. Hubs for box connection to be two-piece with outer internally threaded hub to receive conduit and inner locking ring with bonding screw. Expansion fittings shall allow for a minimum of four inches of movement and shall be similar to O-Z Gedney AX series, complete with bonding jumpers and hardware.

E. Raintight Sealing Hubs: Two piece type with outer internally-threaded hub to receive conduit, inner locking ring with bonding screw, insulated throat, and V-shaped ring or O-ring .

1. Manufacturers: Thomas & Betts H series or Bridgeport.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Interlocked steel or aluminum construction.

B. Flexible Metal Steel Conduit: Conduit to be constructed of spirally wrapped, convoluted hot dip galvanized steel strip. Zinc coating to cover both sides and all edges of steel strip. Convolutions to be interlocked to prevent separation when conduit is bent at radius equal to 4- 1/2 times conduit O.D. Conduit to be listed and labeled under UL 1 - 1985.

C. Flexible Metal Aluminum Conduit: Conduit to be constructed of spirally wrapped, convoluted aluminum strip. Convolutions to be interlocked to prevent separation when conduit is bent at radius equal to 4-1/2 times conduit O.D. Conduit to be listed and labeled under UL 1 - 1985.

1. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 -1988.

2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT and FITTINGS

A. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings shall meet the same construction specifications as flexible metal conduit above and shall have an outer PVC jacket.

B. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Steel Conduit: Conduit to be listed and labeled under UL 360 - 1986.

C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Aluminum Conduit: Conduit to be listed and labeled.

D. Liquidtight flexible conduit connectors to consist of body, cone (ferrule), sealing gland, and nut. Fitting to be UL 514B - 1987 listed for grounding. Body to be cadmium plated malleable iron and have male and female thread for attachment to box or conduit as required.



2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) and FITTINGS

A. Description: Conduit to be seamless, hot dipped or electro-galvanized steel tubing. Galvanizing to provide zinc coating fused to outside walls of conduit. Provide an enamel lubricating coating on the inside of the conduit. Conduit to conform to ANSI C80.3 - 1983 and listed and labeled under UL 797 - 1983.

B. Provide steel set-screw type connectors and couplings for interior EMT fittings. Connectors and fittings to be cadmium plated, zinc plated steel, or malleable iron fittings and include insulated throats. Die cast fittings, components, and indenter type couplings and connectors are not allowed.

C. Expansion fittings for use with EMT shall allow for a minimum of four inches of movement and shall be similar to O-Z Gedney TX series, complete with bonding jumpers and hardware.

2.6 CONDUIT BUSHINGS

A. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1-1/4 inches are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1-1/4 inches and larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides. Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing. Bushings to have screw type grounding terminal.

2.7 WIREWAYS

A. Material: Galvanized sheet steel sized as indicated or required, whichever is greater.

1. Wireway up to 6 inch by 6 inch cross section shall be minimum 16 gauge.2. Wireway larger than 6 inch by 6 inch cross section shall be minimum 14 gauge.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion fittings, seismic connections, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireway as required for complete system.

C. Select features where not otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NEC.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.8 SURFACE RACEWAY

A. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceway.



B. Surface Metal Raceway: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating suitable for painting.

C. Reference standard: Wiremold 2400 series

2.9 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES

A. Outlet Boxes shall be constructed in accordance with National Electrical Code Article 370. Outlet boxes shall be sized for the volume required by the National Electrical Code, but in no case shall they be less than 1-1/2 inches deep.

1. Indoor: Galvanized steel, knockouts as required.2. Exterior boxes or exposed interior wet or damp locations: Cast, deep type, corrosion

proof fasteners, watertight, gasketed, threaded hubs.

3. For suspended or surface-mounted fixtures:

a. Outlet boxes shall be 4 inch octagonal or 4 inch square, in accordance with devices used. Furnish outlet boxes with fixture studs where required. Provide 4 inch octagonal and square outlet boxes for all exposed conduit work with fixture extension pan or deep fixture canopy to enclose the outlet box.

4. For recessed fixtures:

a. 4 inch octagonal or square. Minimum 1-1/2 inches deep and complete with blank cover.

5. Provide corrosion-resistant steel knockout closures for unused openings.

B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1. Boxes for receptacle, telephone and data outlets shall be 4- 11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep and shall be provided with extension rings.

C. Sheet metal boxes for lighting fixtures shall be 4 inch octagonal or square according to fixture hardware requirements.. Boxes shall be at least 1-1/2 inches deep.

D. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, type FD, cast feralloy box with gasketed cover.

2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Small Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1. Flush-mounted boxes shall have an overlapping cover.

B. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

C. Surface-mounted boxes: Screw-on or hinged cover.

D. Covers shall be the same material as the box. Cover shall be on the largest access side of the box, unless otherwise indicated.



E. Boxes located outdoors above ground shall be raintight and gasketed cast aluminum.

F. Boxes located in the ground or in wet or damp locations shall be cast malleable iron having cadmium finish, unless otherwise indicated.

2.11 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Hinged Cover Enclosures: Per NEMA 250, steel enclosure with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. Finish inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

B. Cabinets: Type 1, per NEMA 250, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.12 CONDUIT BODIES

A. Cast metal of type, shape and size to fit location and conduit.

B. Constructed with threaded conduit ends, removable cover, corrosion-resistant screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Install equipment and materials in accordance with requirements in Section 200800 "Seismic Protection."

3.2 WIRING METHODS FOR 600 VOLTS AND LESS

A. Above Grade and Interior Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit. Provide spacers to maintain a minimum of 1/4 inch gap between the conduit and masonry and other surfaces detrimental to aluminum conduit.

B. Dry Interior Locations:

1. Concealed in Walls and Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing unless noted otherwise on drawings.



2. Exposed: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the following shall apply:

a. Use rigid metal or intermediate metal conduit within 6 feet 0 inches of the floor in areas subject to physical damage such as mechanical areas, loading dock areas, generator rooms and storerooms. Electrical metallic tubing may be used above 6 feet 0 inches from the floor and where not subject to physical damage. Rooms dedicated solely to electrical equipment do not require rigid metal or intermediate metal conduit, unless required elsewhere in the documents or by code, such as for medium voltage circuits.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Do not reduce the indicated sizes of raceways.

B. Do not install any raceway in concrete slabs. Under slab conduits to be a minimum of 3" below slab.

C. Raceway routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. Verify field measurements and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in. Raceways are not to cross pipe shafts, or ventilating duct openings, nor are they to pass through HVAC ducts. Support riser raceway at each floor level with clamp hangers. Maintain adequate clearance between raceway and piping.

D. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in raceway system.

F. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one- shot bender when field fabricated elbows are required for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

G. Expansion:

1. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and contraction where raceway crosses seismic and expansion joints. Install expansion fittings in the full open position if installed during a period of lowest expected temperature, and in the fully closed position if installed during a period of highest expected temperature. Install at proportionate intermediate position for intermediate temperatures.

H. In addition to the foregoing, provide expansion fittings according to the following table, for exposed linear runs or runs in hung ceiling cavities where such runs do not contain junction boxes, pull boxes, nor bends totaling more than 30 degrees:



Raceway Material

Indoor, conditioned areas Outdoors and non-conditioned areas

Steel One expansion fitting in runs longer than 80 feet, additional expansion fittings every 400 feet

One expansion fitting in runs longer than 40 feet, additional expansion fittings every 200 feet

I. Seismic:

1. Whenever Specification Section “Seismic Protection” is included in these specifications, the following is also required for those life safety, emergency, fire alarms, etc., conduits that are defined therein. Details on the drawings, when shown, are intended to clarify or supplement these requirements:

a. All expansion joints shall be considered seismic joints that can cause movement in any direction during a seismic event. Conventional expansion fittings are not adequate for this condition.

b. For exposed conduit runs or runs above hung ceilings, provide a length of flexible metal conduit across the joint that will allow 2 inches of conduit movement in any direction. Length of the flexible section shall not exceed 6 feet.

c. For conduit runs in the slab except slab on grade: On each side of the joint, turn the conduit down into a junction box on the underside of the slab or in the hung ceiling below. Provide a piece of exposed flexible metal conduit connecting the boxes. Length of the flexible conduit shall not exceed 6 feet.

d. For slabs on grade: Do not install any conduit through the joint in this slab. Routing underground beneath the joint is permitted only for conduit routed from a point in the building to appoint beyond the perimeter of the building.

J. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

K. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

L. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.

M. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

N. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway.

O. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.

P. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.



Q. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions, except as otherwise indicated.

R. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical.

S. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical and make bends from same center line to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where they can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

T. Raceways passing through exterior below-grade slabs:

1. New walls: Install sleeve unit before wall is poured and install rubber link sealing unit between wall sleeve and raceway after concrete has cured and raceway is run. Ensure that bolt heads remain accessible on inside of building wall.

U. Terminate rigid and IMC conduits in threaded hubs. Screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Use raintight sealing hubs with neoprene O-ring between exterior of enclosure and exterior half of hub where exposed to weather or other wet locations.

V. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Test conduits required to be installed, but left empty, with ball mandrel. Clear any conduit which rejects ball mandrel.

W. Telephone, data, and cable TV System Raceways 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above requirements, install in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of three 90 degree bends or equivalent. Install pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Raceways for telephone, data, and cable TV systems may be employed using NEC ENT tubing.

X. Do not use ENT tubing for any other work and systems except where allowed in the above paragraph.

Y. Install raceway sealing fittings according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations, where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces, and other places indicated on the drawings or required by the NEC.

Z. Install conduit and provide sealant to preserve smoke partition using materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants.”

1. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket.



AA. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet of flexible conduit for recessed and semi- recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use Liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

BB. Surface Metal Raceway: Install a separate green ground conductor in raceway from the junction box supplying the raceway to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. Install surface metal raceway with all necessary offsets, fittings, bends and boxes to comprise a complete system.

1. Select each surface metal raceway outlet box to which a lighting fixture is attached to be of sufficient diameter to provide a seat for the fixture canopy.

2. Where a surface metal raceway is used to supply a L.E.D. lighting fixture having central stem suspension with a backplate and a canopy (with or without extension ring), the backplate and canopy will serve as the outlet box and no separate outlet box need be provided.

3. Provide surface metal raceway outlet box, in addition to the backplate and canopy, at the feed-in location of each fluorescent lighting fixture having end stem suspension.

4. Where a surface metal raceway extension is made from an existing outlet box on which a lighting fixture is installed (provide a backplate slightly smaller than the fixture canopy), no additional surface mounted outlet box need be installed.

CC. Install hinged cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

DD. Provide grounding connections for raceway, boxes, and components as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

EE. GG. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.

3.4 BOXES AND CABINETS

A. Provide boxes as shown and for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment and fixture connections and where required by applicable codes and installation practices.

B. Electrical boxes are shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. The Engineer or Architect shall be allowed to adjust the location of boxes up to 10 feet in any direction without additional cost to the project. This is intended for boxes for receptacles and switches and other wiring devices.

C. Locate boxes to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. Locate to allow proper access. Provide access doors for boxes located above inaccessible ceilings.

D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.



E. Support all boxes rigidly and independently of conduit except where specifically allowed by the National Electrical Code. Use supports suitable for the purpose.

F. Outlet Boxes:

1. Flush-mount outlet boxes in finished areas. Outlets in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and the above removable ceilings may be surface-mounted.

2. Do not install boxes back-to-back in same wall. Provide at least 16 inch separation or greater where required by the building code. In hollow fire walls, maintain minimum 24 inch horizontal separation between outlets on opposite sides. Refer to detail 3, sheet E- 8.01.

a. Masonry walls:

1) Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines where possible. Do not, however, violate maximum heights defined by accessibility codes such as ADA.

a) Coordinate cutting in of walls to achieve neat openings for boxes. Locate boxes in walls so that only the corner need be cut from masonry units where possible.

2) Use multiple gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together. Provide barriers to separate different voltage systems.

3) Ensure that thermal insulation will be in place behind outlet boxes before installing them in insulated walls. Do not damage insulation.

4) For outlets mounted above counters, benches, or backsplashes, coordinate location and mounting heights with architectural details. Install with bottom of box minimum 2 inches above backsplash.

5) Adjust outlet mounting height and horizontal location to agree with required location for equipment served as may be shown on installation instructions or shop drawing for the equipment.

6) Position outlets to locate luminaries as shown on reflected ceiling drawings. For recessed boxes in finished areas, secure to interior wall and partition studs; allow for surface finish thickness.

7) Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

b. Pull and Junction Boxes:

1) Locate above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas.2) Support independent of conduit.3) Locate pull or junction boxes to limit conduit runs to no more than 150 linear

feet of four (4) 90 degree bends between pulling points. For telephone/ data limit bends to no more than three (3) 90 degree bends to pulling points.

G. Provide covers for all boxes.



H. Special care shall be taken to set all flush boxes square and true with the building finish. The edge of the cover shall meet the building finish or be no greater than 1/8 inch back from the finish surface. All wall outlets shall be rigidly secured to the stud system, using adjustable supports where necessary, to prevent all box movement.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Engineer or Architect to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

C. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

3.7 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Mark and identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53 “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record actual routing of all feeder and sub-feeder conduits regardless of size and branch circuits conduits larger than 2 inches.



IDENTIFICATION 26 0553-1

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following:

1. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors2. Operational instruction signs3. Warning and caution signs4. Equipment labels and signs

B. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific items.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Do not submit product data or shop drawings. Non-requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not relieve the CM from full compliance with the plans and specifications.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS


1. Electromark - Wolcott, New York2. Ideal Industries, Inc.3. 3M4. Panduit Corp.5. Seton Name Plate Co.



6. Thomas & Betts7. W. H. Brady, Co. - Signmark Division - Milwaukee, Wisconsin

2.02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Indoor Pictogram Signs for Equipment and Doors to Electrical Equipment Rooms:

Self adhesive, polyester, minimum 7 by 17 inch size.

B. Wire and Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable and conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letter.

C. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends to suit the application. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.

D. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white face and punched for mechanical fasteners.

E. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10- 32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

F. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, nylon one-piece, self-locking cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a minimum temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color-coding.

G. Identification Cable Ties: Same as "Cable Ties" above, except with integral tab of suitable size for marking requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as required by code.

B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.

C. Apply identification to areas as follows:

1. Clean surface of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting.



2. Prime surfaces: For galvanized metal, use single- component acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units, use heavy-duty acrylic resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear alkali-resistant alkyd binder-type sealer.

3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of orange silicone alkyd enamel.

4. Apply primer and finish materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or

accessible raceways of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be

pretensioned, snap-around colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking

tape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely

encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side

by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,

and at 40-foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors:

1. Fire Alarm System: Red

2. Telecommunications: Blue

E. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code-required caution sign for boxes shall be pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover. Legibly mark box covers with identity of contained circuits with contrasting color permanent marker.

F. Conductor Color Coding for Conductors Rated 600 Volts and Less: See Specification Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

G. Tag or label conductors as follows:

1. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility's electrical installations.

H. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows:

1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with Owner approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install fiberglass signs or outdoor items.

I. Install identification as follows:

1. Apply equipment identification nameplates of engraved plastic-laminate on

each major unit of electrical equipment, including central or master unit of each

electrical system. This includes communication, signal and alarm systems,

unless unit is specified with its own self- explanatory identification. Except



as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/2-inch-high lettering

on 1-1/2-inch-high label (2-inch-high where two lines are required), black

lettering in white field. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the

Contract Documents and shop drawings. All nameplates shall be mounted

with rivets or screws. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of

electrical equipment.

a. Fire alarm master station or control panel

b. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosuresc. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items

J. Apply labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, circuit breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm and signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items served by each individual switch and circuit breaker.

K. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

L. Nameplate Data: Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.



WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes various types of receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for approval by the Engineer are not required for this section.

Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non-requirement of

submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not

relieve the CM from full compliance with the plans and specifications.

1. Sample: Submit sample of receptacle plate or switch plate.


A. Comply with NFPA 70 - "National Electrical Code" for devices and installation.

B. Comply with UL 498 - “Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.”

C. Comply with UL 943 - “Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.”

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products which are listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories for their applications and installation conditions and for the environments in which installed.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Wiring Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match devices to plug connectors for Owner-furnished equipment.

B. Cord and Plug Sets: Match cord and plug sets to equipment requirements.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Wiring Devices:

a. Leviton

b. Hubbell Inc.c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand

2. Vacancy Sensors:

a. Watt-Stopper

b. Sensor Switch

c. Leviton

d. Lutron

e. Hubbell

3. Device Enclosures for Outdoor and Other Wet and Damp Locations:

a. Pass & Seymour

b. Leviton, Inc.

c. Hubbell

2.2 WIRING DEVICES

A. Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1, "General Purpose Wiring Devices" and NEMA Standard WD6 “Wiring Device Dimensional Requirements.”

B. Enclosures: NEMA 1 equivalent, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Color:

1. Normal Power - Ivory except as otherwise indicated or required.

2. Standby Power - Gray except as otherwise indicated or required.

3. Life Safety Power - Red except as otherwise indicated or required.

D. Receptacles, Straight-Blade and Locking Type: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with UL Standard 498, "Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles." Provide UL labeling of devices to verify these compliances. Provide straight blade receptacles per table on the following page.



E. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA

WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 1449, IEEE 587 and

Federal Spec W-C 596.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper.

b. Hubbell.

c. Leviton.

d. Pass & Seymour; (reference standard: TR5362).

STRAIGHT BLADE DUPLEX RECEPTACLES

APPLICATION SPECIFICATION ARROW

HART

BRYANT HUBBELL LEVITON PASS &

SEYMOUR

Specification Grade

UL 498, Fed Spec.

WC 596

* * HBL5362 * *

Heavy Duty GFI UL 943, UL 498,

Fed. Spec. WC 596G

* * GF20 * *

Duplex, straight blade devices, 120 volt, 20 amperes. All shall comply with Federal Specification W-C- 596, NEMA configuration 5-20R.

*See reference standard.

F. Locking or special type to be of NEMA configuration called out for the specific

application on the drawings.

1. Type “A” to be a NEMA type 6-20R

2. Type “B” to be a NEMA type L6-30R

3. Type “C” to be a NEMA type 6-15R

4. Type “D” to be a 60 amp pin and sleeve connector/receptacle (Mass Spectrometer)

5. Type “E” to be a European type (Relocated from Culler Hall by the CM)

6. Type “F” to be a NEMA type 5-30R

7. Type “R” to be disconnected and relocated from Culler Hall

G. Cord and Plug Sets: Match voltage and current ratings and number of

conductors to requirements of the equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded copper conductors, with type SOW-A jacket. Grounding conductor shall have green insulation. Minimum ampacity of cord shall be equipment rating plus 25 percent minimum.

2. Plug: Male configuration with nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match to cord and to receptacle type intended for connection.



H. Snap Switches: Quiet-type A.C. switches, Underwriter's Laboratories listed and labeled as complying with UL Standard 20 "General Use Snap Switches, 20A, 277v.

I. Cover Plates for Interior Wiring Devices: Single and combination types that mate

and match with corresponding wiring devices. Features include the following:

1. Color/material: Stainless steel with brushed nickel satin finish

J. Device Enclosures for Outdoor and Other Wet and Damp Locations: Enclosure shall be suitable for wet locations while in use in accordance with Article 410-57 (b) and listed and labeled for the specific use by Underwriter's Laboratories. Enclosure shall be clearly and visibly marked by the factory with the wording "Suitable For Wet Locations While In Use." Enclosure shall be non-metallic with hinged clear cover and integral key operated cover lock. Cover to have two exit holes for up to 3/8 inch diameter cords with holes located at bottom of cover. Provide cover with device opening matched to type of wiring device used - e.g., duplex receptacle, GFCI receptacle, and toggle switch.

K. At CM’s option, receptacles having plug tail connectors consisting of a female at the receptacle and a matching male on the pigtail are acceptable provided that the ratings listings and other

portions of this specification apply. The receptacle shall have no exposed parts or wiring when the mating connector is installed.

2.3 VACANCY SENSORS

A. General:

1. All vacancy sensors shall be UL listed and shall meet the energy code requirements of the area in which they are to be installed. All vacancy sensors shall be manufactured by the same single manufacturer.

2. Install all vacancy sensors in accord with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. The CM and manufacturer shall select units with the required contact voltage and current ratings as required for the lighting load the sensor is to control, taking into account the nature of the load, i.e., incandescent, inductive, etc.

4. In addition, select sensors to cover the physical area in which they are to be installed. This might mean using large area units or multiple units in a given space. When necessary, provide interconnecting wiring between units, relays and manufacturer’s control units where required. These accessories are not shown or specified but shall be provided where the physical conditions of the room or the electrical requirements of the load so necessitate.



5. Make all adjustments for each vacancy sensor for light level, sensitivity and time delay in coordination with and to suit the needs and requirements of the Owner. Tilt and adjust adjustable units for maximum coverage.

6. For all units but especially for non-standard room shapes, such as in the case of long narrow rooms or hallways, select units with the appropriate field of view, standard or long range lenses, wide angle lenses, linear coverage, etc., all as required to suit the application.

7. Coordinate the exact locations and mounting heights of adjustable wall units with the conditions on the wall, with other devices and equipment on the wall and with manufacturer’s recommendations. For ceiling mounted units, coordinate with other ceiling mounted equipment and with reflected ceiling plans.

8. Models numbers listed below are shown for basis of design. Equal manufacturer’s shall be Hubbell and Leviton.

B. Digital Timer (Janitor, storage closets and other similar areas:

1. Programmable digital timer with on-off switch, LCD display, adjustable time out settings (0 to 12 hours), adjustable time scroll on/off settings, flash and beeper warning indications of impending time out. Rated for 120/277 volts, 800 or 1200 watts as required. Suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box. Ivory housing and stainless steel coverplate. Watt Stopper TS-400. Provide 3-way digital timers where shown on plans. Provide wiring per manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Sensor (Interior corridors):

1. Ceiling mounted, suitable for mounting to a standard outlet box, employing dual ultrasonic and passive infrared technology, 360 degree coverage, suitable for 24-volt operation, suitable for use with electronic ballasts and LED drivers, possessing immunity to EMI and RFI, adjustments for light level, time delay and sensitivity. Provide ivory units. Manufacturer to select angle coverage, range, number of sensing sides and other necessary parameters to suit the conditions and size of the space. Watt-Stopper DT-300 Series Ceiling Occupancy. Provide power packs as required. Provide auxiliary relay for control signal “ON” initiation to the Building Automation System (BAS) relay. Provide a separate “hot” conductor to the corridor occupancy sensors, bypassing the BAS relay, to maintain power to occupancy sensor(s) when the BAS relay is “open” (i.e. when the lighting is “off”).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.

B. Install wall plates when painting is complete.



C. Arrangement of Devices: Except as otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

D. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.

E. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone and power service poles are installed to suit the indicated arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

F. Unless noted otherwise, occupancy sensors in bathrooms to be set for 30 minute delay and all other occupancy sensors to be set for to be set for 20 minute delay.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Switches: Where 3 or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere where indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.

2. Receptacles: Identify the panelboard and circuit number from which served. Mark on inside face of coverplate.


A. Testing: Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each operable device at least 6 times.

B. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter operation according to manufacturer recommendations.

C. Replace damaged or defective components.

3.03 CLEANING

A. General: Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices.

END OF SECTION 26 27 26


ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816-1

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes circuit and motor disconnects.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for approval by the Engineer are not required for this section. Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non-requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not relieve the contractor from full compliance with the plans and specifications.

B. Submit the following to the owner at the completion of the project in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1. Product data for products specified in this Section: Include dimensions, ratings, and data on features and components.

2. Maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 01 and in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical Systems."


A. Electrical Component Standards: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" and which are listed and labeled by UL. Comply with UL Standard 98 and NEMA Standard KS 1.

B. All switches 600 amperes and smaller shall be of the same manufacturer; switches larger than 600 amperes shall also be products of one manufacturer, although not necessarily the same manufacturer as switches rated 600 amperes and smaller.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Square D Company2. General Electric3. Eaton Cutler Hammer

2.2 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties, features, ratings, and enclosures as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure except for outdoor switches, and other indicated locations. Outdoor circuit and motor disconnects shall be NEMA 3R enclosures, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be provided with raintight hubs. For motor and motor starter disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads.

B. Switches: Heavy duty, quick make, quick break switches, surface mounted unless otherwise noted, of classes and current ratings indicated. Unless indicated otherwise, provide 3 blade, with solid neutral when a neutral is provided.

C. Fusible switches 800A and 1200A may be as described above or may be high pressure contact type.

D. Switches 1600A and above shall be high pressure contact type. Bolted pressure switches are not allowed.

E. High pressure contact switches shall be equipped with stored energy spring charged mechanism that provides high speed positive switching action independent of the speed at which the handle is operated. Switch blades shall be visible when the switch is in the OFF position and the door is open. Units shall be 100% rated.

F. Provide positive pressure, reinforced type Class R fuse clips for fusible switches 600 amps or less to prevent other than UL Class RK current limiting fuses. Provide for class L fuses for switches over 600A.

G. Switches shall have provisions for padlocking the enclosure in the closed position and another provision for padlocking the switch operator in the open and closed positions. It shall not be possible to open the switch enclosure with the switch operator in the closed position, except by means of a defeat mechanism located to be found by experienced and knowledgeable personnel only. The defeat mechanism shall not be obvious to an untrained person.

1. Lugs: Provide mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors for number, size, and material of conductors indicated.



H. Service Switches: Shall be as above, but shall also be UL listed for use as service equipment under UL Standard 98 or 869.

I. Provide heavy duty pin and tumbler type padlock for each switch located in areas outside of locked mechanical and electrical rooms. Provide keying per Owner's requirements.

J. Switches for elevator controllers shall be equal to Bussman Power Module Switch units with the following features:

1. Fusible disconnect switch2. Lockable3. 120 volt shunt-trip control4. Control power terminal block5. Ground lug6. 208~120 volt control power transformer7. Key test switch8. Fire alarm voltage monitor relay9. 2 NO and 2 NC auxiliary contacts Switch shall not trigger fire alarm trouble signal upon

disconnecting the elevator for routine maintenance. Verify final ampere rating and fuse size with elevator manufacturer prior to ordering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches and circuit breakers in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install disconnect switches for use as local disconnect switches with motor driven equipment within site of the associated equipment.

C. Install enclosed switches and circuit breakers level and plumb.

D. Install wiring between enclosed switches and circuit breakers and control and indication devices.

E. Connect enclosed switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

3.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Provide a nameplate conforming with Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems” on every disconnect defining what the load that it serves or disconnects.




A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise indicated, do not test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening and closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100-1

SECTION 26 51 00 - LIGHTING FIXTURES

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. Emergency lighting units.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for occupancy sensors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. LED: Light Emitting Diode

G. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

H. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.3. Ballast, including BF.4. Energy-efficiency data.5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.

6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Installation instructions.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging the completed Work.

3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.



2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

B. Special Warranty for LED Luminaires: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of LED luminaire agrees to repair or replace components of LED driver that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for LED Luminaires: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least two of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 50 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Generator Transfer Device (GTD): One for every 20 GTD’s provided.4. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at

least one of each type.5. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed.

Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated on the lighting fixture schedule sheets E-2.60 and E.2.61.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.



E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

F. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, etc.), tube configuration (twin,

quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.e. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

H. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer,

or bi-level control is indicated.4. Sound Rating: Class A5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better.7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.



8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.9. BF: 0.88 or higher unless otherwise noted on lighting fixture schedules10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI

C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Electronic Programmed Rapid-Start Ballasts for T5, T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following:

1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

C. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.3. Sound Rating: Class A.4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better.6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. except fixtures in apartment units may use

low-power- factor electronic ballasts10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for

limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life.

2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a

self-contained power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when

circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Flourescent Lighting Alternate Only: T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 25 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flourescent Lighting Alternate Only: T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flourescent Lighting Alternate Only: T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated



D. Flourescent Lighting Alternate Only: T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flourescent Lighting Alternate Only: Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 41K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Associate, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4- inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or

rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."




A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.
